]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blob - ld/ld.texinfo
Properly implement STT_COMMON
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979 instead.
980
981 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982 @cindex symbols, require defined
983 @cindex defined symbol
984 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992 @kindex -Ur
993 @cindex constructors
994 @item -Ur
995 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002 @samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005 @cindex orphan sections
1006 @cindex sections, orphan
1007 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013 @table @code
1014 @item place
1015 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019 @item discard
1020 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023 @item warn
1024 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025 issue a warning.
1026
1027 @item error
1028 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029 @end table
1030
1031 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
1033 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041 in a linker script.
1042
1043 @kindex -v
1044 @kindex -V
1045 @kindex --version
1046 @cindex version
1047 @item -v
1048 @itemx --version
1049 @itemx -V
1050 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1051 lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053 @kindex -x
1054 @kindex --discard-all
1055 @cindex deleting local symbols
1056 @item -x
1057 @itemx --discard-all
1058 Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060 @kindex -X
1061 @kindex --discard-locals
1062 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1063 @item -X
1064 @itemx --discard-locals
1065 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1068
1069 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071 @cindex symbol tracing
1072 @item -y @var{symbol}
1073 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076 to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1082 @item -Y @var{path}
1083 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084 for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087 @item -z @var{keyword}
1088 The recognized keywords are:
1089 @table @samp
1090
1091 @item combreloc
1092 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093 lookup caching possible.
1094
1095 @item common
1096 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097 link.
1098
1099 @item defs
1100 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1101 shared libraries are still allowed.
1102
1103 @item execstack
1104 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
1106 @item global
1107 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1108 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
1111 @item initfirst
1112 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117 objects.
1118
1119 @item interpose
1120 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121 but the primary executable.
1122
1123 @item lazy
1124 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127 Lazy binding is the default.
1128
1129 @item loadfltr
1130 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131 runtime.
1132
1133 @item muldefs
1134 Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136 @item nocombreloc
1137 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
1139 @item nocommon
1140 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141 link.
1142
1143 @item nocopyreloc
1144 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1146
1147 @item nodefaultlib
1148 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149 ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151 @item nodelete
1152 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154 @item nodlopen
1155 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157 @item nodump
1158 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
1160 @item noexecstack
1161 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
1163 @item text
1164 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166 @item notext
1167 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169 @item textoff
1170 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
1172 @item norelro
1173 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
1175 @item now
1176 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180 first called.
1181
1182 @item origin
1183 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
1185 @item relro
1186 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
1188 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
1194 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1195 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
1199 @item bndplt
1200 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
1202 @item noextern-protected-data
1203 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1205 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1207 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1208 i386 and x86-64.
1209
1210 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211 Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212 This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1213 dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214 Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
1216 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1217 @itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1218 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1219 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1220 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1221 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1222 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1223 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1224 @option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1225 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1226 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1227 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1228 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1229
1230 @end table
1231
1232 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1233
1234 @kindex -(
1235 @cindex groups of archives
1236 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1237 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1238 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1239 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1240
1241 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1242 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1243 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1244 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1245 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1246 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1247 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1248 resolved.
1249
1250 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1251 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1252 more archives.
1253
1254 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1255 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1256 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1257 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1258 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1259 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1260 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1261 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1262 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1263 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1264 restore the old behaviour.
1265
1266 @kindex --as-needed
1267 @kindex --no-as-needed
1268 @item --as-needed
1269 @itemx --no-as-needed
1270 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1271 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1272 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1273 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1274 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1275 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1276 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1277 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1278 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1279 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1280 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1281 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1282 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1283
1284 @kindex --add-needed
1285 @kindex --no-add-needed
1286 @item --add-needed
1287 @itemx --no-add-needed
1288 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1289 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1290 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1291 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1292
1293 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1294 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1295 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1296
1297 @kindex -Bdynamic
1298 @kindex -dy
1299 @kindex -call_shared
1300 @item -Bdynamic
1301 @itemx -dy
1302 @itemx -call_shared
1303 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1304 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1305 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1306 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1307 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1308 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1309
1310 @kindex -Bgroup
1311 @item -Bgroup
1312 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1313 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1314 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1315 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1316 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1317
1318 @kindex -Bstatic
1319 @kindex -dn
1320 @kindex -non_shared
1321 @kindex -static
1322 @item -Bstatic
1323 @itemx -dn
1324 @itemx -non_shared
1325 @itemx -static
1326 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1327 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1328 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1329 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1330 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1331 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1332 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1333 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1334 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1335 libraries.
1336
1337 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1338 @item -Bsymbolic
1339 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1340 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1341 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1342 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1343 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1344 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1345 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1346 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1347
1348 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1349 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1350 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1351 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1352 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1353 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1354 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1355 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1356 libraries and position independent executables.
1357
1358 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1359 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1360 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1361 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1362 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1363 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1364 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1365 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1366 which support shared libraries.
1367
1368 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1369 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1370
1371 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1372 @item --dynamic-list-data
1373 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1374
1375 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1376 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1377 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1378 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1379
1380 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1381 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1382 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1383
1384 @kindex --check-sections
1385 @kindex --no-check-sections
1386 @item --check-sections
1387 @itemx --no-check-sections
1388 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1389 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1390 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1391 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1392 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1393 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1394 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1395 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1396 option.
1397
1398 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1399 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1400 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1401 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1402 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1403 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1404 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1405 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1406 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1407 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1408 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1409 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1410
1411 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1412 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1413 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1414 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1415 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1416 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1417 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1418 symbols.
1419
1420 @cindex cross reference table
1421 @kindex --cref
1422 @item --cref
1423 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1424 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1425 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1426
1427 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1428 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1429 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1430 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1431 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1432 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1433 symbol are listed.
1434
1435 @cindex common allocation
1436 @kindex --no-define-common
1437 @item --no-define-common
1438 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1439 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1440 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1441
1442 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1443 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1444 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1445 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1446 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1447 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1448 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1449 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1450 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1451 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1452
1453 @cindex symbols, from command line
1454 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1455 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1456 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1457 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1458 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1459 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1460 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1461 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1462 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1463 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1464 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1465 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1466
1467 @cindex demangling, from command line
1468 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1469 @kindex --no-demangle
1470 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1471 @itemx --no-demangle
1472 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1473 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1474 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1475 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1476 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1477 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1478 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1479 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1480 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1481
1482 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1483 @kindex -I@var{file}
1484 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1485 @item -I@var{file}
1486 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1487 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1488 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1489 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1490 doing.
1491
1492 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1493 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1494 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1495 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1496 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1497 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1498
1499 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1500 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1501 @item --fatal-warnings
1502 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1503 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1504 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1505
1506 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1507 @item --force-exe-suffix
1508 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1509
1510 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1511 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1512 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1513 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1514 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1515 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1516
1517 @kindex --gc-sections
1518 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1519 @cindex garbage collection
1520 @item --gc-sections
1521 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1522 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1523 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1524 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1525 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1526 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1527 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1528
1529 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1530 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1531 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1532 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1533 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1534 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1535 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1536 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1537 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1538
1539 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1540 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1541 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1542 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1543
1544 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1545 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1546 @cindex garbage collection
1547 @item --print-gc-sections
1548 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1549 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1550 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1551 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1552 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1553 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1554 line.
1555
1556 @kindex --print-output-format
1557 @cindex output format
1558 @item --print-output-format
1559 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1560 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1561 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1562
1563 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1564 @cindex memory usage
1565 @item --print-memory-usage
1566 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1567 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1568 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1569 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1570 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1571
1572 @smallexample
1573 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1574 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1575 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1576 @end smallexample
1577
1578 @cindex help
1579 @cindex usage
1580 @kindex --help
1581 @item --help
1582 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1583
1584 @kindex --target-help
1585 @item --target-help
1586 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1587
1588 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1589 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1590 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1591 @option{-M} option, above.
1592
1593 @cindex memory usage
1594 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1595 @item --no-keep-memory
1596 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1597 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1598 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1599 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1600 while linking a large executable.
1601
1602 @kindex --no-undefined
1603 @kindex -z defs
1604 @item --no-undefined
1605 @itemx -z defs
1606 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1607 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1608 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1609 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1610 libraries being linked in.
1611
1612 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1613 @kindex -z muldefs
1614 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1615 @itemx -z muldefs
1616 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1617 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1618 first definition will be used.
1619
1620 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1621 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1622 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1623 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1624 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1625 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1626 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1627 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1628 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1629
1630 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1631 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1632 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1633 a shared library.
1634
1635 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1636 libraries specified at link time are that:
1637
1638 @itemize @bullet
1639 @item
1640 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1641 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1642 resolvable at load time.
1643 @item
1644 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1645 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1646
1647 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1648 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1649 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1650 appropriate memset function.
1651 @end itemize
1652
1653 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1654 @item --no-undefined-version
1655 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1656 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1657 will be issued instead.
1658
1659 @kindex --default-symver
1660 @item --default-symver
1661 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1662 exported symbols.
1663
1664 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1665 @item --default-imported-symver
1666 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1667 imported symbols.
1668
1669 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1670 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1671 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1672 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1673 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1674 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1675 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1676 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1677 inappropriate.
1678
1679 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1680 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1681 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1682 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1683
1684 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1685 @item --no-whole-archive
1686 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1687 archive files.
1688
1689 @cindex output file after errors
1690 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1691 @item --noinhibit-exec
1692 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1693 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1694 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1695 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1696
1697 @kindex -nostdlib
1698 @item -nostdlib
1699 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1700 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1701 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1702
1703 @ifclear SingleFormat
1704 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1705 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1706 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1707 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1708 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1709 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1710 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1711 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1712 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1713 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1714 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1715 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1716 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1717 @end ifclear
1718
1719 @kindex -pie
1720 @kindex --pic-executable
1721 @item -pie
1722 @itemx --pic-executable
1723 @cindex position independent executables
1724 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1725 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1726 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1727 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1728 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1729 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1730
1731 @kindex -qmagic
1732 @item -qmagic
1733 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1734
1735 @kindex -Qy
1736 @item -Qy
1737 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1738
1739 @kindex --relax
1740 @cindex synthesizing linker
1741 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1742 @cindex --no-relax
1743 @item --relax
1744 @itemx --no-relax
1745 An option with machine dependent effects.
1746 @ifset GENERIC
1747 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1748 @end ifset
1749 @ifset H8300
1750 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1751 @end ifset
1752 @ifset I960
1753 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1754 @end ifset
1755 @ifset XTENSA
1756 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1757 @end ifset
1758 @ifset M68HC11
1759 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1760 @end ifset
1761 @ifset NIOSII
1762 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1763 @end ifset
1764 @ifset POWERPC
1765 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1766 @end ifset
1767
1768 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1769 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1770 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1771 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1772 instructions, and combining constant values.
1773
1774 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1775 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1776 @ifset GENERIC
1777 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1778 family of processors.
1779 @end ifset
1780
1781 @ifset GENERIC
1782 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1783 but ignored.
1784 @end ifset
1785
1786 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1787 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1788
1789 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1790 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1791 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1792 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1793 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1794 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1795 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1796 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1797 @ifset GENERIC
1798 (such as VxWorks)
1799 @end ifset
1800 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1801 run-time memory.
1802
1803 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1804 or symbols needed for relocations.
1805
1806 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1807 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1808
1809 @ifset GENERIC
1810 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1811 @cindex runtime library search path
1812 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1813 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1814 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1815 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1816 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1817 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1818 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1819 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1820 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1821 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1822
1823 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1824 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1825 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1826 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1827 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1828 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1829 file systems.
1830
1831 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1832 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1833 the @option{-rpath} option.
1834 @end ifset
1835
1836 @ifset GENERIC
1837 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1838 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1839 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1840 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1841 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1842 of the input files.
1843
1844 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1845 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1846 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1847 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1848 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1849 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1850 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1851 appearing multiple times.
1852
1853 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1854 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1855 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1856 runtime linker would do.
1857
1858 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1859 libraries:
1860 @enumerate
1861 @item
1862 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1863 @item
1864 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1865 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1866 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1867 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1868 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1869 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1870 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1871 @item
1872 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1873 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1874 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1875 @item
1876 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1877 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1878 @item
1879 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1880 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1881 @item
1882 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1883 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1884 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1885 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1886 @item
1887 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1888 @item
1889 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1890 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1891 @end enumerate
1892
1893 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1894 warning and continue with the link.
1895 @end ifset
1896
1897 @kindex -shared
1898 @kindex -Bshareable
1899 @item -shared
1900 @itemx -Bshareable
1901 @cindex shared libraries
1902 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1903 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1904 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1905 undefined symbols in the link.
1906
1907 @kindex --sort-common
1908 @item --sort-common
1909 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1910 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1911 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1912 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1913 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1914 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1915 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1916 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1917
1918 @kindex --sort-section=name
1919 @item --sort-section=name
1920 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1921 patterns in the linker script.
1922
1923 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1924 @item --sort-section=alignment
1925 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1926 patterns in the linker script.
1927
1928 @kindex --split-by-file
1929 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1930 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1931 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1932 size of 1 if not given.
1933
1934 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1935 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1936 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1937 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1938 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1939 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1940 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1941 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1942 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1943 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1944 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1945 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1946
1947 @kindex --stats
1948 @item --stats
1949 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1950 as execution time and memory usage.
1951
1952 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1953 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1954 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1955 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1956 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1957
1958 @kindex --traditional-format
1959 @cindex traditional format
1960 @item --traditional-format
1961 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1962 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1963 use the traditional format instead.
1964
1965 @cindex dbx
1966 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1967 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1968 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1969 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1970 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1971 combine duplicate entries.
1972
1973 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1974 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1975 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1976 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1977 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1978 line.
1979 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1980 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1981 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1982 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1983 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1984
1985 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1986 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1987 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1988 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1989 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1990 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1991 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1992 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1993 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1994
1995 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1996 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1997 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1998 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1999 byte of the text segment.
2000
2001 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2002 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2003 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2004 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2005 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2006 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2007
2008 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2009 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2010 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2011 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2012 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2013
2014 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2015 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2016 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2017 values for @samp{method}:
2018
2019 @table @samp
2020 @item ignore-all
2021 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2022
2023 @item report-all
2024 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2025
2026 @item ignore-in-object-files
2027 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2028 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2029
2030 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2031 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2032 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2033 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2034 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2035 command line.
2036 @end table
2037
2038 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2039 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2040
2041 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2042 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2043 can change this to a warning.
2044
2045 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2046 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2047 @item --dll-verbose
2048 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2049 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2050 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2051 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2052 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2053
2054 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2055 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2056 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2057 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2058 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2059 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2060 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2061 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2062 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2063 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2064 @xref{WIN32}.
2065
2066 @kindex --warn-common
2067 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2068 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2069 @item --warn-common
2070 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2071 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2072 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2073 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2074 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2075 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2076
2077 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2078
2079 @table @samp
2080 @item int i = 1;
2081 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2082 file.
2083
2084 @item extern int i;
2085 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2086 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2087 variable somewhere.
2088
2089 @item int i;
2090 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2091 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2092 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2093 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2094 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2095 a definition of the same variable.
2096 @end table
2097
2098 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2099 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2100 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2101 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2102 a common symbol.
2103
2104 @enumerate
2105 @item
2106 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2107 definition for the symbol.
2108 @smallexample
2109 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2110 overridden by definition
2111 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2112 @end smallexample
2113
2114 @item
2115 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2116 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2117 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2118 @smallexample
2119 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2120 overriding common
2121 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2122 @end smallexample
2123
2124 @item
2125 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2126 @smallexample
2127 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2128 of `@var{symbol}'
2129 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2130 @end smallexample
2131
2132 @item
2133 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2134 @smallexample
2135 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2136 overridden by larger common
2137 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2138 @end smallexample
2139
2140 @item
2141 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2142 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2143 encountered in a different order.
2144 @smallexample
2145 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2146 overriding smaller common
2147 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2148 @end smallexample
2149 @end enumerate
2150
2151 @kindex --warn-constructors
2152 @item --warn-constructors
2153 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2154 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2155 detect the use of global constructors.
2156
2157 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2158 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2159 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2160 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2161 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2162 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2163 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2164 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2165 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2166 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2167 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2168 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2169 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2170
2171 @kindex --warn-once
2172 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2173 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2174 @item --warn-once
2175 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2176 which refers to it.
2177
2178 @kindex --warn-section-align
2179 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2180 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2181 @item --warn-section-align
2182 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2183 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2184 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2185 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2186 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2187
2188 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2189 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2190 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2191
2192 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2193 @item --warn-alternate-em
2194 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2195
2196 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2197 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2198 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2199 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2200 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2201
2202 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2203 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2204 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2205 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2206
2207 @kindex --whole-archive
2208 @cindex including an entire archive
2209 @item --whole-archive
2210 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2211 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2212 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2213 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2214 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2215 library. This option may be used more than once.
2216
2217 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2218 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2219 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2220 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2221 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2222
2223 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2224 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2225 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2226 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2227 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2228 @var{symbol}.
2229
2230 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2231 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2232 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2233 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2234
2235 Here is a trivial example:
2236
2237 @smallexample
2238 void *
2239 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2240 @{
2241 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2242 return __real_malloc (c);
2243 @}
2244 @end smallexample
2245
2246 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2247 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2248 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2249 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2250
2251 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2252 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2253 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2254 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2255 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2256
2257 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2258 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2259 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2260 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2261
2262 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2263 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2264 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2265 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2266 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2267
2268 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2269 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2270 @item --enable-new-dtags
2271 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2272 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2273 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2274 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2275 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2276 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2277 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2278 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2279
2280 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2281 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2282 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2283 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2284 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2285 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2286 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2287
2288 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2289 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2290 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2291 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2292 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2293 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2294 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2295
2296 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2297 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2298 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2299 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2300 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2301 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2302 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2303 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2304 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2305 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2306 compress DWARF debug sections.
2307 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2308 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2309 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2310 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2311 compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2312 The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2313 the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2314 determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
2315
2316 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2317 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2318 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2319 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2320 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2321 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2322
2323 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2324 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2325 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2326 has been used.
2327
2328 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2329 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2330
2331 @kindex --build-id
2332 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2333 @item --build-id
2334 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2335 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2336 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2337 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2338 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2339 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2340 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2341 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2342 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2343 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2344 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2345
2346 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2347 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2348 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2349 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2350 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2351 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2352
2353 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2354 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2355 @end table
2356
2357 @c man end
2358
2359 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2360
2361 @c man begin OPTIONS
2362
2363 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2364 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2365 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2366 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2367 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2368 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2369 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2370 object file).
2371
2372 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2373 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2374 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2375 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2376
2377 @table @gcctabopt
2378
2379 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2380 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2381 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2382 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2383 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2384
2385 @kindex --base-file
2386 @item --base-file @var{file}
2387 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2388 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2389 @file{dlltool}.
2390 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2391
2392 @kindex --dll
2393 @item --dll
2394 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2395 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2396 file.
2397 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2398
2399 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2400 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2401 @item --enable-long-section-names
2402 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2403 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2404 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2405 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2406 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2407 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2408 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2409 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2410 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2411 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2412 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2413 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2414 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2415 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2416 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2417 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2418 image and not stripping symbols.
2419 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2420
2421 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2422 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2423 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2424 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2425 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2426 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2427 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2428 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2429 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2430 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2431 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2432 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2433 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2434 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2435 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2436 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2437 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2438 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2439
2440 @kindex --leading-underscore
2441 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2442 @item --leading-underscore
2443 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2444 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2445 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2446 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2447
2448 @cindex DLLs, creating
2449 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2450 @item --export-all-symbols
2451 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2452 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2453 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2454 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2455 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2456 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2457 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2458 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2459 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2460 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2461 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2462 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2463 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2464 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2465 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2466 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2467 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2468 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2469 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2470 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2471 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2472 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2473 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2474
2475 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2476 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2477 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2478 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2479 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2480
2481 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2482 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2483 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2484 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2485
2486 @kindex --file-alignment
2487 @item --file-alignment
2488 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2489 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2490 512.
2491 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2492
2493 @cindex heap size
2494 @kindex --heap
2495 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2496 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2497 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2498 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2499 committed.
2500 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2501
2502 @cindex image base
2503 @kindex --image-base
2504 @item --image-base @var{value}
2505 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2506 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2507 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2508 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2509 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2510 for dlls.
2511 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2512
2513 @kindex --kill-at
2514 @item --kill-at
2515 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2516 symbols before they are exported.
2517 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2518
2519 @kindex --large-address-aware
2520 @item --large-address-aware
2521 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2522 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2523 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2524 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2525 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2526 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2527
2528 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2529 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2530 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2531 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2532 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2533 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2534 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2535
2536 @kindex --major-image-version
2537 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2538 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2539 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2540
2541 @kindex --major-os-version
2542 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2543 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2544 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2545
2546 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2547 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2548 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2549 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2550
2551 @kindex --minor-image-version
2552 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2553 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2554 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2555
2556 @kindex --minor-os-version
2557 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2558 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2559 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2560
2561 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2562 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2563 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2564 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2565
2566 @cindex DEF files, creating
2567 @cindex DLLs, creating
2568 @kindex --output-def
2569 @item --output-def @var{file}
2570 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2571 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2572 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2573 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2574 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2575 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2576
2577 @cindex DLLs, creating
2578 @kindex --out-implib
2579 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2580 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2581 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2582 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2583 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2584 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2585 creation step.
2586 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2587
2588 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2589 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2590 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2591 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2592 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2593 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2594 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2595 execution are avoided.
2596 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2597
2598 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2599 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2600 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2601 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2602 default.
2603 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2604
2605 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2606 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2607 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2608 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2609 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2610 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2611 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2612 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2613 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2614 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2615
2616 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2617 @item --enable-auto-import
2618 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2619 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2620 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2621 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2622 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2623 specification published by Microsoft.
2624
2625 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2626 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2627 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2628 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2629 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2630
2631 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2632 see this message:
2633
2634 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2635 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2636
2637 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2638 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2639 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2640 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2641 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2642 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2643 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2644 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2645 the warning, and exit.
2646
2647 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2648 data type of the exported variable:
2649
2650 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2651 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2652 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2653
2654 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2655 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2656 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2657 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2658
2659 @example
2660 extern type extern_array[];
2661 extern_array[1] -->
2662 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2663 @end example
2664
2665 or
2666
2667 @example
2668 extern type extern_array[];
2669 extern_array[1] -->
2670 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2671 @end example
2672
2673 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2674 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2675
2676 @example
2677 extern struct s extern_struct;
2678 extern_struct.field -->
2679 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2680 @end example
2681
2682 or
2683
2684 @example
2685 extern long long extern_ll;
2686 extern_ll -->
2687 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2688 @end example
2689
2690 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2691 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2692 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2693 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2694 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2695 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2696 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2697 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2698
2699 Original:
2700 @example
2701 --foo.h
2702 extern int arr[];
2703 --foo.c
2704 #include "foo.h"
2705 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2706 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2707 @}
2708 @end example
2709
2710 Solution 1:
2711 @example
2712 --foo.h
2713 extern int arr[];
2714 --foo.c
2715 #include "foo.h"
2716 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2717 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2718 volatile int *parr = arr;
2719 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2720 @}
2721 @end example
2722
2723 Solution 2:
2724 @example
2725 --foo.h
2726 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2727 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2728 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2729 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2730 #else
2731 #define FOO_IMPORT
2732 #endif
2733 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2734 --foo.c
2735 #include "foo.h"
2736 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2737 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2738 @}
2739 @end example
2740
2741 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2742 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2743 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2744 functions).
2745 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2746
2747 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2748 @item --disable-auto-import
2749 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2750 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2751 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2752
2753 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2754 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2755 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2756 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2757 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2758 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2759 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2760
2761 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2762 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2763 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2764 DLLs.
2765 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2766
2767 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2768 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2769 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2770 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2771
2772 @kindex --section-alignment
2773 @item --section-alignment
2774 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2775 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2776 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2777
2778 @cindex stack size
2779 @kindex --stack
2780 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2781 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2782 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2783 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2784 committed.
2785 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2786
2787 @kindex --subsystem
2788 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2789 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2790 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2791 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2792 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2793 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2794 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2795 @var{which}.
2796 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2797
2798 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2799 of the PE file header:
2800 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2801
2802 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2803 @item --high-entropy-va
2804 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2805 (ASLR).
2806
2807 @kindex --dynamicbase
2808 @item --dynamicbase
2809 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2810 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2811 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2812
2813 @kindex --forceinteg
2814 @item --forceinteg
2815 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2816
2817 @kindex --nxcompat
2818 @item --nxcompat
2819 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2820 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2821
2822 @kindex --no-isolation
2823 @item --no-isolation
2824 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2825
2826 @kindex --no-seh
2827 @item --no-seh
2828 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2829 this image.
2830
2831 @kindex --no-bind
2832 @item --no-bind
2833 Do not bind this image.
2834
2835 @kindex --wdmdriver
2836 @item --wdmdriver
2837 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2838
2839 @kindex --tsaware
2840 @item --tsaware
2841 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2842
2843 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2844 @item --insert-timestamp
2845 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2846 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2847 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2848 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2849 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2850 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2851 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2852 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2853 identically.
2854 @end table
2855
2856 @c man end
2857
2858 @ifset C6X
2859 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2860
2861 @c man begin OPTIONS
2862
2863 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2864 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2865 all executables use an index of 0.
2866
2867 @table @gcctabopt
2868
2869 @kindex --dsbt-size
2870 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2871 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2872 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2873 entries.
2874
2875 @kindex --dsbt-index
2876 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2877 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2878 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2879 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2880 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2881
2882 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2883 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2884 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2885
2886 @end table
2887
2888 @c man end
2889 @end ifset
2890
2891 @ifset M68HC11
2892 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2893
2894 @c man begin OPTIONS
2895
2896 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2897 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2898
2899 @table @gcctabopt
2900
2901 @kindex --no-trampoline
2902 @item --no-trampoline
2903 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2904 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2905 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2906
2907 @kindex --bank-window
2908 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2909 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2910 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2911 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2912 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2913
2914 @end table
2915
2916 @c man end
2917 @end ifset
2918
2919 @ifset M68K
2920 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2921
2922 @c man begin OPTIONS
2923
2924 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2925 when linking for 68K targets.
2926
2927 @table @gcctabopt
2928
2929 @kindex --got
2930 @item --got=@var{type}
2931 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2932 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2933 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2934 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2935
2936 @end table
2937
2938 @c man end
2939 @end ifset
2940
2941 @ifset MIPS
2942 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2943
2944 @c man begin OPTIONS
2945
2946 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2947 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2948
2949 @table @gcctabopt
2950
2951 @kindex --insn32
2952 @item --insn32
2953 @kindex --no-insn32
2954 @itemx --no-insn32
2955 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2956 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2957 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2958 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2959 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2960 possible.
2961
2962 @end table
2963
2964 @c man end
2965 @end ifset
2966
2967 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2968 @node Environment
2969 @section Environment Variables
2970
2971 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2972
2973 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2974 @ifclear SingleFormat
2975 @code{GNUTARGET},
2976 @end ifclear
2977 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2978
2979 @ifclear SingleFormat
2980 @kindex GNUTARGET
2981 @cindex default input format
2982 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2983 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2984 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2985 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2986 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2987 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2988 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2989 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2990 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2991 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2992 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2993 @end ifclear
2994
2995 @kindex LDEMULATION
2996 @cindex default emulation
2997 @cindex emulation, default
2998 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2999 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3000 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3001 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3002 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3003 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3004 linker was configured.
3005
3006 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3007 @cindex demangling, default
3008 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3009 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3010 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3011 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3012 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3013 options.
3014
3015 @c man end
3016 @end ifset
3017
3018 @node Scripts
3019 @chapter Linker Scripts
3020
3021 @cindex scripts
3022 @cindex linker scripts
3023 @cindex command files
3024 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3025 written in the linker command language.
3026
3027 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3028 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3029 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3030 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3031 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3032 described below.
3033
3034 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3035 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3036 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3037 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3038 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3039
3040 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3041 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3042 default linker script.
3043
3044 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3045 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3046 Linker Scripts}.
3047
3048 @menu
3049 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3050 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3051 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3052 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3053 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3054 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3055 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3056 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3057 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3058 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3059 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3060 @end menu
3061
3062 @node Basic Script Concepts
3063 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3064 @cindex linker script concepts
3065 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3066 describe the linker script language.
3067
3068 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3069 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3070 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3071 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3072 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3073 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3074 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3075 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3076
3077 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3078 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3079 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3080 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3081 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3082 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3083 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3084 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3085 of debugging information.
3086
3087 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3088 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3089 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3090 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3091 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3092 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3093 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3094 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3095 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3096 RAM address would be the VMA.
3097
3098 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3099 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3100
3101 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3102 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3103 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3104 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3105 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3106 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3107 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3108
3109 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3110 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3111 option.
3112
3113 @node Script Format
3114 @section Linker Script Format
3115 @cindex linker script format
3116 Linker scripts are text files.
3117
3118 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3119 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3120 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3121 generally ignored.
3122
3123 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3124 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3125 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3126 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3127 file name.
3128
3129 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3130 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3131 to whitespace.
3132
3133 @node Simple Example
3134 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3135 @cindex linker script example
3136 @cindex example of linker script
3137 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3138
3139 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3140 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3141 memory layout of the output file.
3142
3143 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3144 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3145 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3146 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3147 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3148 your input files.
3149
3150 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3151 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3152 linker script which will do that:
3153 @smallexample
3154 SECTIONS
3155 @{
3156 . = 0x10000;
3157 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3158 . = 0x8000000;
3159 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3160 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3161 @}
3162 @end smallexample
3163
3164 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3165 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3166 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3167
3168 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3169 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3170 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3171 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3172 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3173 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3174 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3175
3176 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3177 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3178 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3179 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3180 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3181 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3182
3183 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3184 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3185 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3186
3187 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3188 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3189 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3190 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3191 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3192 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3193 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3194
3195 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3196 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3197 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3198 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3199 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3200 sections.
3201
3202 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3203
3204 @node Simple Commands
3205 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3206 @cindex linker script simple commands
3207 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3208
3209 @menu
3210 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3211 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3212 @ifclear SingleFormat
3213 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3214 @end ifclear
3215
3216 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3217 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3218 @end menu
3219
3220 @node Entry Point
3221 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3222 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3223 @cindex start of execution
3224 @cindex first instruction
3225 @cindex entry point
3226 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3227 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3228 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3229 @smallexample
3230 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3231 @end smallexample
3232
3233 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3234 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3235 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3236 @itemize @bullet
3237 @item
3238 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3239 @item
3240 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3241 @item
3242 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3243 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3244 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3245 @item
3246 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3247 @item
3248 The address @code{0}.
3249 @end itemize
3250
3251 @node File Commands
3252 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3253 @cindex linker script file commands
3254 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3255
3256 @table @code
3257 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3258 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3259 @cindex including a linker script
3260 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3261 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3262 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3263 10 levels deep.
3264
3265 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3266 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3267
3268 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3269 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3270 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3271 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3272 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3273 @cindex linker script input object files
3274 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3275 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3276
3277 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3278 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3279 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3280
3281 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3282 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3283
3284 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3285 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3286 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3287 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3288 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3289 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3290 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3291 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3292 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3293
3294 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3295 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3296 @samp{-l}.
3297
3298 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3299 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3300 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3301
3302 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3303 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3304 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3305 @cindex grouping input files
3306 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3307 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3308 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3309 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3310
3311 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3312 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3313 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3314 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3315 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3316 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3317 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3318 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3319 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3320 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3321 setting afterwards.
3322
3323 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3324 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3325 @cindex output file name in linker script
3326 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3327 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3328 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3329 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3330 precedence.
3331
3332 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3333 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3334
3335 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3336 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3337 @cindex library search path in linker script
3338 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3339 @cindex search path in linker script
3340 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3341 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3342 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3343 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3344 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3345 the command line option are searched first.
3346
3347 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3348 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3349 @cindex first input file
3350 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3351 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3352 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3353 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3354 first file.
3355 @end table
3356
3357 @ifclear SingleFormat
3358 @node Format Commands
3359 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3360 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3361
3362 @table @code
3363 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3364 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3365 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3366 @cindex output file format in linker script
3367 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3368 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3369 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3370 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3371 line option takes precedence.
3372
3373 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3374 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3375 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3376 desired endianness.
3377
3378 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3379 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3380 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3381 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3382
3383 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3384 command:
3385 @smallexample
3386 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3387 @end smallexample
3388 This says that the default format for the output file is
3389 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3390 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3391 format.
3392
3393 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3394 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3395 @cindex input file format in linker script
3396 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3397 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3398 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3399 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3400 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3401 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3402 @end table
3403 @end ifclear
3404
3405 @node REGION_ALIAS
3406 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3407 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3408 @cindex region alias
3409 @cindex region names
3410
3411 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3412 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3413
3414 @smallexample
3415 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3416 @end smallexample
3417
3418 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3419 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3420 to memory regions. An example follows.
3421
3422 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3423 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3424 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3425 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3426 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3427 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3428 sections:
3429
3430 @itemize @bullet
3431 @item
3432 @code{.text} program code;
3433 @item
3434 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3435 @item
3436 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3437 @item
3438 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3439 @end itemize
3440
3441 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3442 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3443 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3444 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3445 @code{C}:
3446 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3447 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3448 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3449 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3450 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3451 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3452 @end multitable
3453 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3454 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3455 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3456 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3457
3458 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3459 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3460 memory layout:
3461 @smallexample
3462 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3463
3464 SECTIONS
3465 @{
3466 .text :
3467 @{
3468 *(.text)
3469 @} > REGION_TEXT
3470 .rodata :
3471 @{
3472 *(.rodata)
3473 rodata_end = .;
3474 @} > REGION_RODATA
3475 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3476 @{
3477 data_start = .;
3478 *(.data)
3479 @} > REGION_DATA
3480 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3481 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3482 .bss :
3483 @{
3484 *(.bss)
3485 @} > REGION_BSS
3486 @}
3487 @end smallexample
3488
3489 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3490 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3491 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3492 @table @code
3493 @item A
3494 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3495 @smallexample
3496 MEMORY
3497 @{
3498 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3499 @}
3500
3501 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3502 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3503 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3504 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3505 @end smallexample
3506 @item B
3507 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3508 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3509 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3510 @smallexample
3511 MEMORY
3512 @{
3513 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3514 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3515 @}
3516
3517 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3518 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3519 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3520 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3521 @end smallexample
3522 @item C
3523 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3524 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3525 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3526 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3527 @smallexample
3528 MEMORY
3529 @{
3530 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3531 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3532 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3533 @}
3534
3535 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3536 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3537 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3538 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3539 @end smallexample
3540 @end table
3541
3542 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3543 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3544 necessary:
3545 @smallexample
3546 #include <string.h>
3547
3548 extern char data_start [];
3549 extern char data_size [];
3550 extern char data_load_start [];
3551
3552 void copy_data(void)
3553 @{
3554 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3555 @{
3556 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3557 @}
3558 @}
3559 @end smallexample
3560
3561 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3562 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3563 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3564
3565 @table @code
3566 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3567 @kindex ASSERT
3568 @cindex assertion in linker script
3569 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3570 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3571
3572 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3573 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3574 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3575 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3576 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3577
3578 @smallexample
3579 .stack :
3580 @{
3581 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3582 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3583 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3584 @}
3585 @end smallexample
3586
3587 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3588 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3589 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3590
3591 @smallexample
3592 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3593 .stack :
3594 @{
3595 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3596 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3597 @}
3598 @end smallexample
3599
3600 will work.
3601
3602 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3603 @kindex EXTERN
3604 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3605 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3606 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3607 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3608 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3609 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3610
3611 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3612 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3613 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3614 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3615 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3616 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3617
3618 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3619 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3620 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3621 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3622 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3623 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3624
3625 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3626 @kindex INSERT
3627 @cindex insert user script into default script
3628 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3629 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3630 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3631 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3632 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3633 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3634 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3635 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3636 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3637 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3638 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3639 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3640 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3641
3642 @smallexample
3643 SECTIONS
3644 @{
3645 OVERLAY :
3646 @{
3647 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3648 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3649 @}
3650 @}
3651 INSERT AFTER .text;
3652 @end smallexample
3653
3654 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3655 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3656 @cindex cross references
3657 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3658 references among certain output sections.
3659
3660 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3661 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3662 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3663 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3664 a function defined in the other section.
3665
3666 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3667 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3668 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3669 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3670 names.
3671
3672 @ifclear SingleFormat
3673 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3674 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3675 @cindex machine architecture
3676 @cindex architecture
3677 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3678 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3679 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3680 the @samp{-f} option.
3681 @end ifclear
3682
3683 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3684 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3685 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3686 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3687 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3688 @xref{Expression Section}.
3689 @end table
3690
3691 @node Assignments
3692 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3693 @cindex assignment in scripts
3694 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3695 @cindex variables, defining
3696 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3697 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3698
3699 @menu
3700 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3701 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3702 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3703 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3704 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3705 @end menu
3706
3707 @node Simple Assignments
3708 @subsection Simple Assignments
3709
3710 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3711
3712 @table @code
3713 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3714 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3715 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3716 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3717 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3718 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3719 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3720 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3721 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3722 @end table
3723
3724 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3725 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3726 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3727
3728 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3729 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3730
3731 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3732
3733 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3734
3735 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3736 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3737 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3738
3739 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3740 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3741
3742 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3743 assignments may be used:
3744
3745 @smallexample
3746 floating_point = 0;
3747 SECTIONS
3748 @{
3749 .text :
3750 @{
3751 *(.text)
3752 _etext = .;
3753 @}
3754 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3755 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3756 @}
3757 @end smallexample
3758 @noindent
3759 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3760 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3761 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3762 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3763 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3764
3765 @node HIDDEN
3766 @subsection HIDDEN
3767 @cindex HIDDEN
3768 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3769 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3770
3771 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3772 @code{HIDDEN}:
3773
3774 @smallexample
3775 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3776 SECTIONS
3777 @{
3778 .text :
3779 @{
3780 *(.text)
3781 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3782 @}
3783 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3784 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3785 @}
3786 @end smallexample
3787 @noindent
3788 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3789
3790 @node PROVIDE
3791 @subsection PROVIDE
3792 @cindex PROVIDE
3793 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3794 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3795 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3796 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3797 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3798 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3799 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3800 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3801
3802 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3803 @smallexample
3804 SECTIONS
3805 @{
3806 .text :
3807 @{
3808 *(.text)
3809 _etext = .;
3810 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3811 @}
3812 @}
3813 @end smallexample
3814
3815 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3816 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3817 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3818 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3819 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3820 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3821
3822 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3823 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3824 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3825 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3826 hidden and won't be exported.
3827
3828 @node Source Code Reference
3829 @subsection Source Code Reference
3830
3831 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3832 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3833 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3834 symbol that does not have a value.
3835
3836 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3837 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3838 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3839 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3840 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3841 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3842 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3843 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3844
3845 @smallexample
3846 extern int foo;
3847 @end smallexample
3848
3849 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3850
3851 @smallexample
3852 _foo = 1000;
3853 @end smallexample
3854
3855 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3856 transformation has taken place.
3857
3858 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3859 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3860 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3861 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3862 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3863 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3864 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3865
3866 @smallexample
3867 int foo = 1000;
3868 @end smallexample
3869
3870 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3871 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3872 number 1000 is initially stored.
3873
3874 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3875 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3876 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3877 So:
3878
3879 @smallexample
3880 foo = 1;
3881 @end smallexample
3882
3883 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3884 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3885 address. Whereas:
3886
3887 @smallexample
3888 int * a = & foo;
3889 @end smallexample
3890
3891 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3892 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3893 the variable @samp{a}.
3894
3895 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3896 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3897 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3898
3899 @smallexample
3900 foo = 1000;
3901 @end smallexample
3902
3903 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3904 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3905 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3906 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3907 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3908
3909 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3910 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3911 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3912 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3913 linker script contains these declarations:
3914
3915 @smallexample
3916 @group
3917 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3918 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
3919 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3920 @end group
3921 @end smallexample
3922
3923 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3924
3925 @smallexample
3926 @group
3927 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3928
3929 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3930 @end group
3931 @end smallexample
3932
3933 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3934 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3935 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3936
3937 @smallexample
3938 @group
3939 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3940
3941 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3942 @end group
3943 @end smallexample
3944
3945 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3946 operators.
3947
3948 @node SECTIONS
3949 @section SECTIONS Command
3950 @kindex SECTIONS
3951 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3952 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3953
3954 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3955 @smallexample
3956 SECTIONS
3957 @{
3958 @var{sections-command}
3959 @var{sections-command}
3960 @dots{}
3961 @}
3962 @end smallexample
3963
3964 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3965
3966 @itemize @bullet
3967 @item
3968 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3969 @item
3970 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3971 @item
3972 an output section description
3973 @item
3974 an overlay description
3975 @end itemize
3976
3977 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3978 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3979 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3980 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3981 the layout of the output file.
3982
3983 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3984 below.
3985
3986 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3987 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3988 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3989 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3990 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3991 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3992
3993 @menu
3994 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3995 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3996 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3997 * Input Section:: Input section description
3998 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3999 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4000 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4001 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4002 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4003 @end menu
4004
4005 @node Output Section Description
4006 @subsection Output Section Description
4007 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4008 @smallexample
4009 @group
4010 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4011 [AT(@var{lma})]
4012 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4013 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4014 [@var{constraint}]
4015 @{
4016 @var{output-section-command}
4017 @var{output-section-command}
4018 @dots{}
4019 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4020 @end group
4021 @end smallexample
4022
4023 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4024
4025 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4026 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4027 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4028 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4029 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4030
4031 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4032
4033 @itemize @bullet
4034 @item
4035 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4036 @item
4037 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4038 @item
4039 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4040 @item
4041 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4042 @end itemize
4043
4044 @node Output Section Name
4045 @subsection Output Section Name
4046 @cindex name, section
4047 @cindex section name
4048 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4049 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4050 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4051 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4052 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4053 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4054 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4055 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4056 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4057 commas must be quoted.
4058
4059 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4060 Discarding}.
4061
4062 @node Output Section Address
4063 @subsection Output Section Address
4064 @cindex address, section
4065 @cindex section address
4066 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4067 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4068 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4069
4070 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4071 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4072 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4073 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4074 contained within the output section.
4075
4076 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4077
4078 @itemize @bullet
4079 @item
4080 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4081 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4082 in that region.
4083
4084 @item
4085 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4086 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4087 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4088 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4089
4090 @item
4091 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4092 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4093 counter.
4094 @end itemize
4095
4096 @noindent
4097 For example:
4098
4099 @smallexample
4100 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4101 @end smallexample
4102
4103 @noindent
4104 and
4105
4106 @smallexample
4107 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4108 @end smallexample
4109
4110 @noindent
4111 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4112 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4113 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4114 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4115 input sections.
4116
4117 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4118 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4119 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4120 do something like this:
4121 @smallexample
4122 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4123 @end smallexample
4124 @noindent
4125 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4126 aligned upward to the specified value.
4127
4128 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4129 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4130 sections are ignored).
4131
4132 @node Input Section
4133 @subsection Input Section Description
4134 @cindex input sections
4135 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4136 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4137
4138 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4139 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4140 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4141 map the input files into your memory layout.
4142
4143 @menu
4144 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4145 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4146 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4147 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4148 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4149 @end menu
4150
4151 @node Input Section Basics
4152 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4153 @cindex input section basics
4154 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4155 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4156
4157 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4158 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4159
4160 The most common input section description is to include all input
4161 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4162 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4163 @smallexample
4164 *(.text)
4165 @end smallexample
4166 @noindent
4167 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4168 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4169 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4170 example:
4171 @smallexample
4172 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4173 @end smallexample
4174 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4175 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4176
4177 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4178 @smallexample
4179 *(.text .rdata)
4180 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4181 @end smallexample
4182 @noindent
4183 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4184 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4185 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4186 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4187 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4188 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4189
4190 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4191 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4192 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4193 @smallexample
4194 data.o(.data)
4195 @end smallexample
4196
4197 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4198 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4199
4200 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4201
4202 @smallexample
4203 @group
4204 SECTIONS @{
4205 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4206 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4207 @}
4208 @end group
4209 @end smallexample
4210
4211 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4212 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4213 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4214 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4215 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4216
4217 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4218 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4219 with no whitespace around the colon.
4220
4221 @table @samp
4222 @item archive:file
4223 matches file within archive
4224 @item archive:
4225 matches the whole archive
4226 @item :file
4227 matches file but not one in an archive
4228 @end table
4229
4230 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4231 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4232 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4233 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4234 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4235 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4236 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4237 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4238 command.
4239
4240 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4241 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4242 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4243 @smallexample
4244 data.o
4245 @end smallexample
4246
4247 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4248 and does not contain any wild card
4249 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4250 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4251 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4252 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4253 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4254 the archive search path.
4255
4256 @node Input Section Wildcards
4257 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4258 @cindex input section wildcards
4259 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4260 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4261 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4262 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4263 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4264
4265 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4266 pattern for the file name.
4267
4268 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4269
4270 @table @samp
4271 @item *
4272 matches any number of characters
4273 @item ?
4274 matches any single character
4275 @item [@var{chars}]
4276 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4277 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4278 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4279 @item \
4280 quotes the following character
4281 @end table
4282
4283 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4284 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4285 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4286 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4287 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4288 a @samp{/} character.
4289
4290 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4291 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4292 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4293
4294 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4295 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4296 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4297 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4298 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4299 @smallexample
4300 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4301 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4302 @end smallexample
4303
4304 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4305 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4306 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4307 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4308 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4309 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4310 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4311
4312 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4313 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4314 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4315 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4316 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4317 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4318
4319 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4320 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4321 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4322 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4323 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4324
4325 @cindex SORT
4326 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4327
4328 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4329 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4330
4331 @enumerate
4332 @item
4333 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4334 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4335 sections have the same name.
4336 @item
4337 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4338 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4339 sections have the same alignment.
4340 @item
4341 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4342 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4343 @item
4344 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4345 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4346 @item
4347 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4348 @end enumerate
4349
4350 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4351 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4352 takes precedence over the command line option.
4353
4354 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4355 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4356 treated as nested sorting command.
4357
4358 @enumerate
4359 @item
4360 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4361 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4362 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4363 @item
4364 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4365 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4366 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4367 @end enumerate
4368
4369 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4370 command line option will be ignored.
4371
4372 @cindex SORT_NONE
4373 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4374 section sorting option.
4375
4376 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4377 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4378 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4379
4380 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4381 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4382 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4383 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4384 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4385 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4386 @smallexample
4387 @group
4388 SECTIONS @{
4389 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4390 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4391 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4392 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4393 @}
4394 @end group
4395 @end smallexample
4396
4397 @node Input Section Common
4398 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4399 @cindex common symbol placement
4400 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4401 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4402 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4403 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4404 named @samp{COMMON}.
4405
4406 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4407 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4408 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4409 input files are placed in another section.
4410
4411 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4412 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4413 @smallexample
4414 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4415 @end smallexample
4416
4417 @cindex scommon section
4418 @cindex small common symbols
4419 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4420 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4421 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4422 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4423 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4424 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4425 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4426 locations.
4427
4428 @cindex [COMMON]
4429 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4430 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4431 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4432
4433 @node Input Section Keep
4434 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4435 @cindex KEEP
4436 @cindex garbage collection
4437 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4438 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4439 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4440 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4441 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4442
4443 @node Input Section Example
4444 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4445 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4446 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4447 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4448 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4449 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4450 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4451 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4452 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4453 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4454
4455 @smallexample
4456 @group
4457 SECTIONS @{
4458 outputa 0x10000 :
4459 @{
4460 all.o
4461 foo.o (.input1)
4462 @}
4463 @end group
4464 @group
4465 outputb :
4466 @{
4467 foo.o (.input2)
4468 foo1.o (.input1)
4469 @}
4470 @end group
4471 @group
4472 outputc :
4473 @{
4474 *(.input1)
4475 *(.input2)
4476 @}
4477 @}
4478 @end group
4479 @end smallexample
4480
4481 @node Output Section Data
4482 @subsection Output Section Data
4483 @cindex data
4484 @cindex section data
4485 @cindex output section data
4486 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4487 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4488 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4489 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4490 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4491 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4492 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4493 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4494 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4495 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4496 counter.
4497
4498 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4499 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4500 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4501 stored.
4502
4503 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4504 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4505 @smallexample
4506 BYTE(1)
4507 LONG(addr)
4508 @end smallexample
4509
4510 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4511 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4512 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4513 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4514 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4515
4516 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4517 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4518 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4519 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4520 endianness of the first input object file.
4521
4522 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4523 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4524 @smallexample
4525 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4526 @end smallexample
4527 whereas this will work:
4528 @smallexample
4529 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4530 @end smallexample
4531
4532 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4533 @cindex holes, filling
4534 @cindex unspecified memory
4535 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4536 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4537 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4538 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4539 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4540 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4541 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4542 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4543 different parts of an output section.
4544
4545 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4546 value @samp{0x90}:
4547 @smallexample
4548 FILL(0x90909090)
4549 @end smallexample
4550
4551 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4552 section attribute, but it only affects the
4553 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4554 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4555 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4556 expression.
4557
4558 @node Output Section Keywords
4559 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4560 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4561 commands.
4562
4563 @table @code
4564 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4565 @cindex input filename symbols
4566 @cindex filename symbols
4567 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4568 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4569 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4570 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4571 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4572
4573 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4574 normally used for any other object file format.
4575
4576 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4577 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4578 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4579 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4580 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4581 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4582 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4583 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4584 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4585 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4586 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4587 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4588 ignored for other object file formats.
4589
4590 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4591 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4592 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4593 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4594 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4595 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4596 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4597 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4598 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4599 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4600 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4601 @code{exit}.
4602
4603 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4604 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4605 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4606 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4607 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4608 runtime code expects to see.
4609
4610 @smallexample
4611 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4612 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4613 *(.ctors)
4614 LONG(0)
4615 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4616 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4617 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4618 *(.dtors)
4619 LONG(0)
4620 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4621 @end smallexample
4622
4623 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4624 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4625 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4626 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4627 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4628 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4629 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4630 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4631
4632 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4633 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4634 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4635 scripts.
4636
4637 @end table
4638
4639 @node Output Section Discarding
4640 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4641 @cindex discarding sections
4642 @cindex sections, discarding
4643 @cindex removing sections
4644 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4645 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4646 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4647 @smallexample
4648 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4649 @end smallexample
4650 @noindent
4651 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4652 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4653 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4654 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4655 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4656 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4657 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4658 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4659 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4660
4661 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4662 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4663 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4664 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4665 section is discarded.
4666
4667 @cindex /DISCARD/
4668 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4669 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4670 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4671
4672 @node Output Section Attributes
4673 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4674 @cindex output section attributes
4675 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4676 like this:
4677
4678 @smallexample
4679 @group
4680 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4681 [AT(@var{lma})]
4682 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4683 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4684 [@var{constraint}]
4685 @{
4686 @var{output-section-command}
4687 @var{output-section-command}
4688 @dots{}
4689 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4690 @end group
4691 @end smallexample
4692
4693 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4694 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4695 remaining section attributes.
4696
4697 @menu
4698 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4699 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4700 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4701 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4702 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4703 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4704 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4705 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4706 @end menu
4707
4708 @node Output Section Type
4709 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4710 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4711 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4712
4713 @table @code
4714 @item NOLOAD
4715 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4716 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4717 @item DSECT
4718 @itemx COPY
4719 @itemx INFO
4720 @itemx OVERLAY
4721 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4722 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4723 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4724 section when the program is run.
4725 @end table
4726
4727 @kindex NOLOAD
4728 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4729 @cindex loading, preventing
4730 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4731 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4732 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4733 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4734 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4735 @smallexample
4736 @group
4737 SECTIONS @{
4738 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4739 @dots{}
4740 @}
4741 @end group
4742 @end smallexample
4743
4744 @node Output Section LMA
4745 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4746 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4747 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4748 @cindex load address
4749 @cindex section load address
4750 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4751 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4752 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4753 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4754 address is optional.
4755
4756 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4757 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4758 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4759 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4760 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4761
4762 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4763 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4764 load address:
4765
4766 @itemize @bullet
4767 @item
4768 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4769 the LMA address as well.
4770
4771 @item
4772 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4773
4774 @item
4775 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4776 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4777 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4778 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4779 the last section in the located region.
4780
4781 @item
4782 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4783 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4784
4785 @item
4786 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4787 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4788 @end itemize
4789
4790 @cindex ROM initialized data
4791 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4792 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4793 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4794 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4795 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4796 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4797 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4798 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4799 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4800
4801 @smallexample
4802 @group
4803 SECTIONS
4804 @{
4805 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4806 .mdata 0x2000 :
4807 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4808 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4809 .bss 0x3000 :
4810 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4811 @}
4812 @end group
4813 @end smallexample
4814
4815 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4816 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4817 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4818 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4819 script.
4820
4821 @smallexample
4822 @group
4823 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4824 char *src = &_etext;
4825 char *dst = &_data;
4826
4827 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4828 while (dst < &_edata)
4829 *dst++ = *src++;
4830
4831 /* Zero bss. */
4832 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4833 *dst = 0;
4834 @end group
4835 @end smallexample
4836
4837 @node Forced Output Alignment
4838 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4839 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4840 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4841 @cindex output section alignment
4842 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4843 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4844 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4845
4846 @node Forced Input Alignment
4847 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4848 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4849 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4850 @cindex input section alignment
4851 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4852 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4853 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4854
4855 @node Output Section Constraint
4856 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4857 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4858 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4859 @cindex constraints on output sections
4860 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4861 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4862 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4863 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4864
4865 @node Output Section Region
4866 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4867 @kindex >@var{region}
4868 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4869 @cindex memory regions and sections
4870 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4871 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4872
4873 Here is a simple example:
4874 @smallexample
4875 @group
4876 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4877 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4878 @end group
4879 @end smallexample
4880
4881 @node Output Section Phdr
4882 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4883 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4884 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4885 @cindex program headers and sections
4886 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4887 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4888 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4889 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4890 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4891 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4892
4893 Here is a simple example:
4894 @smallexample
4895 @group
4896 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4897 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4898 @end group
4899 @end smallexample
4900
4901 @node Output Section Fill
4902 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4903 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4904 @cindex section fill pattern
4905 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4906 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4907 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4908 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4909 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4910 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4911 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4912 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4913 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4914 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4915 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4916 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4917 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4918
4919 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4920 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4921
4922 Here is a simple example:
4923 @smallexample
4924 @group
4925 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4926 @end group
4927 @end smallexample
4928
4929 @node Overlay Description
4930 @subsection Overlay Description
4931 @kindex OVERLAY
4932 @cindex overlays
4933 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4934 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4935 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4936 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4937 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4938 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4939 than another.
4940
4941 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4942 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4943 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4944 command is as follows:
4945 @smallexample
4946 @group
4947 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4948 @{
4949 @var{secname1}
4950 @{
4951 @var{output-section-command}
4952 @var{output-section-command}
4953 @dots{}
4954 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4955 @var{secname2}
4956 @{
4957 @var{output-section-command}
4958 @var{output-section-command}
4959 @dots{}
4960 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4961 @dots{}
4962 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4963 @end group
4964 @end smallexample
4965
4966 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4967 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4968 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4969 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4970 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4971 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4972
4973 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4974 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4975
4976 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4977 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4978 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4979 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4980 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4981 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4982
4983 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4984 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4985 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4986 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4987 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4988
4989 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4990 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4991 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4992 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4993 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4994 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4995 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4996
4997 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4998 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4999
5000 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5001 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5002 @smallexample
5003 @group
5004 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5005 @{
5006 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5007 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5008 @}
5009 @end group
5010 @end smallexample
5011 @noindent
5012 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5013 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5014 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5015 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5016 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5017 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5018
5019 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5020 like the following.
5021
5022 @smallexample
5023 @group
5024 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5025 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5026 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5027 @end group
5028 @end smallexample
5029
5030 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5031 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5032 example could have been written identically as follows.
5033
5034 @smallexample
5035 @group
5036 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5037 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5038 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5039 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5040 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5041 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5042 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5043 @end group
5044 @end smallexample
5045
5046 @node MEMORY
5047 @section MEMORY Command
5048 @kindex MEMORY
5049 @cindex memory regions
5050 @cindex regions of memory
5051 @cindex allocating memory
5052 @cindex discontinuous memory
5053 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5054 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5055
5056 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5057 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5058 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5059 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5060 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5061 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5062 around to fit into the available regions.
5063
5064 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5065 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5066 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5067 @code{MEMORY} is:
5068 @smallexample
5069 @group
5070 MEMORY
5071 @{
5072 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5073 @dots{}
5074 @}
5075 @end group
5076 @end smallexample
5077
5078 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5079 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5080 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5081 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5082 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5083 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5084 command.
5085
5086 @cindex memory region attributes
5087 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5088 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5089 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5090 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5091 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5092 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5093 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5094
5095 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5096 @table @samp
5097 @item R
5098 Read-only section
5099 @item W
5100 Read/write section
5101 @item X
5102 Executable section
5103 @item A
5104 Allocatable section
5105 @item I
5106 Initialized section
5107 @item L
5108 Same as @samp{I}
5109 @item !
5110 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5111 @end table
5112
5113 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5114 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5115 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5116 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5117 attributes.
5118
5119 @kindex ORIGIN =
5120 @kindex o =
5121 @kindex org =
5122 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5123 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5124 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5125 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5126 @code{ORG}).
5127
5128 @kindex LENGTH =
5129 @kindex len =
5130 @kindex l =
5131 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5132 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5133 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5134 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5135
5136 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5137 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5138 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5139 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5140 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5141 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5142 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5143 region.
5144
5145 @smallexample
5146 @group
5147 MEMORY
5148 @{
5149 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5150 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5151 @}
5152 @end group
5153 @end smallexample
5154
5155 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5156 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5157 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5158 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5159 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5160 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5161 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5162 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5163 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5164
5165 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5166 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5167 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5168
5169 @smallexample
5170 @group
5171 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5172 @end group
5173 @end smallexample
5174
5175 @node PHDRS
5176 @section PHDRS Command
5177 @kindex PHDRS
5178 @cindex program headers
5179 @cindex ELF program headers
5180 @cindex program segments
5181 @cindex segments, ELF
5182 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5183 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5184 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5185 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5186
5187 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5188 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5189 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5190 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5191 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5192
5193 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5194 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5195 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5196 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5197 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5198
5199 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5200 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5201 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5202
5203 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5204 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5205
5206 @smallexample
5207 @group
5208 PHDRS
5209 @{
5210 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5211 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5212 @}
5213 @end group
5214 @end smallexample
5215
5216 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5217 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5218 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5219 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5220 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5221 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5222
5223 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5224 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5225 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5226 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5227 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5228 Section Phdr}.
5229
5230 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5231 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5232 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5233 contain the section.
5234
5235 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5236 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5237 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5238 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5239 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5240 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5241 segment at all.
5242
5243 @kindex FILEHDR
5244 @kindex PHDRS
5245 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5246 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5247 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5248 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5249 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5250 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5251 these keywords.
5252
5253 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5254 value of the keyword.
5255
5256 @table @asis
5257 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5258 Indicates an unused program header.
5259
5260 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5261 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5262 the file.
5263
5264 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5265 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5266
5267 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5268 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5269 found.
5270
5271 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5272 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5273
5274 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5275 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5276 ABI.
5277
5278 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5279 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5280
5281 @item @var{expression}
5282 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5283 be used for types not defined above.
5284 @end table
5285
5286 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5287 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5288 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5289 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5290 output section attribute.
5291
5292 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5293 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5294 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5295 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5296 header.
5297
5298 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5299 headers used on a native ELF system.
5300
5301 @example
5302 @group
5303 PHDRS
5304 @{
5305 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5306 interp PT_INTERP ;
5307 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5308 data PT_LOAD ;
5309 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5310 @}
5311
5312 SECTIONS
5313 @{
5314 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5315 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5316 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5317 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5318 @dots{}
5319 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5320 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5321 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5322 @dots{}
5323 @}
5324 @end group
5325 @end example
5326
5327 @node VERSION
5328 @section VERSION Command
5329 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5330 @cindex symbol versions
5331 @cindex version script
5332 @cindex versions of symbols
5333 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5334 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5335 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5336 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5337 shared library.
5338
5339 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5340 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5341 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5342
5343 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5344 @smallexample
5345 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5346 @end smallexample
5347
5348 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5349 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5350 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5351 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5352 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5353 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5354 library.
5355
5356 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5357 examples.
5358
5359 @smallexample
5360 VERS_1.1 @{
5361 global:
5362 foo1;
5363 local:
5364 old*;
5365 original*;
5366 new*;
5367 @};
5368
5369 VERS_1.2 @{
5370 foo2;
5371 @} VERS_1.1;
5372
5373 VERS_2.0 @{
5374 bar1; bar2;
5375 extern "C++" @{
5376 ns::*;
5377 "f(int, double)";
5378 @};
5379 @} VERS_1.2;
5380 @end smallexample
5381
5382 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5383 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5384 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5385 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5386 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5387 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5388 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5389 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5390 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5391 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5392
5393 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5394 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5395 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5396
5397 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5398 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5399 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5400
5401 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5402 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5403 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5404 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5405 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5406 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5407 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5408 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5409 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5410
5411 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5412 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5413 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5414 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5415
5416 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5417 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5418 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5419 won't.
5420
5421 @smallexample
5422 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5423 @end smallexample
5424
5425 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5426 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5427 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5428 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5429 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5430 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5431 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5432 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5433 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5434 search for each symbol reference.
5435
5436 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5437 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5438 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5439 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5440 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5441 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5442 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5443 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5444 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5445
5446 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5447 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5448 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5449 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5450 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5451 @smallexample
5452 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5453 @end smallexample
5454 @noindent
5455 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5456 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5457 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5458 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5459 takes precedence over a version script.
5460
5461 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5462 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5463 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5464 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5465 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5466
5467 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5468 source file. Here is an example:
5469
5470 @smallexample
5471 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5472 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5473 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5474 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5475 @end smallexample
5476
5477 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5478 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5479 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5480 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5481
5482 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5483 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5484 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5485 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5486 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5487 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5488
5489 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5490 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5491 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5492 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5493
5494 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5495
5496 @smallexample
5497 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5498 @end smallexample
5499
5500 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5501 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5502 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5503 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5504 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5505
5506 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5507 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5508 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5509 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5510 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5511 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5512 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5513 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5514 expect when you upgrade.
5515
5516 @node Expressions
5517 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5518 @cindex expressions
5519 @cindex arithmetic
5520 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5521 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5522 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5523 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5524
5525 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5526
5527 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5528 expressions.
5529
5530 @menu
5531 * Constants:: Constants
5532 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5533 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5534 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5535 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5536 * Operators:: Operators
5537 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5538 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5539 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5540 @end menu
5541
5542 @node Constants
5543 @subsection Constants
5544 @cindex integer notation
5545 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5546 All constants are integers.
5547
5548 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5549 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5550 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5551 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5552 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5553 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5554
5555 @cindex scaled integers
5556 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5557 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5558 @cindex suffixes for integers
5559 @cindex integer suffixes
5560 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5561 constant by
5562 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5563 @ifnottex
5564 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5565 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5566 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5567 @end ifnottex
5568 @tex
5569 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5570 @end tex
5571 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5572 respectively. For example, the following
5573 all refer to the same quantity:
5574
5575 @smallexample
5576 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5577 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5578 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5579 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5580 @end smallexample
5581
5582 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5583 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5584
5585 @node Symbolic Constants
5586 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5587 @cindex symbolic constants
5588 @kindex CONSTANT
5589 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5590 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5591
5592 @table @code
5593 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5594 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5595 The target's maximum page size.
5596
5597 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5598 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5599 The target's default page size.
5600 @end table
5601
5602 So for example:
5603
5604 @smallexample
5605 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5606 @end smallexample
5607
5608 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5609 supported by the target.
5610
5611 @node Symbols
5612 @subsection Symbol Names
5613 @cindex symbol names
5614 @cindex names
5615 @cindex quoted symbol names
5616 @kindex "
5617 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5618 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5619 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5620 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5621 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5622 @smallexample
5623 "SECTION" = 9;
5624 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5625 @end smallexample
5626
5627 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5628 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5629 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5630
5631 @node Orphan Sections
5632 @subsection Orphan Sections
5633 @cindex orphan
5634 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5635 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5636 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5637 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5638 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5639 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5640 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5641 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5642 at the end of the file.
5643
5644 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5645 well as section flag.
5646
5647 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5648 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5649 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5650
5651 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5652 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5653 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5654 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5655 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5656 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5657 character.
5658
5659 @node Location Counter
5660 @subsection The Location Counter
5661 @kindex .
5662 @cindex dot
5663 @cindex location counter
5664 @cindex current output location
5665 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5666 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5667 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5668 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5669 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5670
5671 @cindex holes
5672 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5673 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5674 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5675 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5676 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5677
5678 @smallexample
5679 SECTIONS
5680 @{
5681 output :
5682 @{
5683 file1(.text)
5684 . = . + 1000;
5685 file2(.text)
5686 . += 1000;
5687 file3(.text)
5688 @} = 0x12345678;
5689 @}
5690 @end smallexample
5691 @noindent
5692 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5693 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5694 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5695 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5696 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5697 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5698
5699 @cindex dot inside sections
5700 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5701 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5702 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5703 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5704 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5705 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5706
5707 @smallexample
5708 SECTIONS
5709 @{
5710 . = 0x100
5711 .text: @{
5712 *(.text)
5713 . = 0x200
5714 @}
5715 . = 0x500
5716 .data: @{
5717 *(.data)
5718 . += 0x600
5719 @}
5720 @}
5721 @end smallexample
5722
5723 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5724 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5725 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5726 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5727 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5728 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5729 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5730 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5731
5732 @cindex dot outside sections
5733 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5734 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5735 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5736
5737 @smallexample
5738 SECTIONS
5739 @{
5740 start_of_text = . ;
5741 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5742 end_of_text = . ;
5743
5744 start_of_data = . ;
5745 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5746 end_of_data = . ;
5747 @}
5748 @end smallexample
5749
5750 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5751 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5752 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5753 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5754 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5755 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5756 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5757 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5758 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5759 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5760 as follows:
5761
5762 @smallexample
5763 SECTIONS
5764 @{
5765 start_of_text = . ;
5766 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5767 end_of_text = . ;
5768
5769 start_of_data = . ;
5770 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5771 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5772 end_of_data = . ;
5773 @}
5774 @end smallexample
5775
5776 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5777 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5778 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5779 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5780 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5781 section. So you could write:
5782
5783 @smallexample
5784 SECTIONS
5785 @{
5786 start_of_text = . ;
5787 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5788 end_of_text = . ;
5789
5790 . = . ;
5791 start_of_data = . ;
5792 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5793 end_of_data = . ;
5794 @}
5795 @end smallexample
5796
5797 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5798 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5799
5800 @need 2000
5801 @node Operators
5802 @subsection Operators
5803 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5804 @cindex arithmetic operators
5805 @cindex precedence in expressions
5806 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5807 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5808 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5809 @ifnottex
5810 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5811 @smallexample
5812 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5813 (highest)
5814 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5815 2 left * / %
5816 3 left + -
5817 4 left >> <<
5818 5 left == != > < <= >=
5819 6 left &
5820 7 left |
5821 8 left &&
5822 9 left ||
5823 10 right ? :
5824 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5825 (lowest)
5826 @end smallexample
5827 Notes:
5828 (1) Prefix operators
5829 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5830 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5831 @end ifnottex
5832 @tex
5833 \vskip \baselineskip
5834 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5835 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5836 \hrule
5837 \halign
5838 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5839 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5840 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5841 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5842 \noalign{\hrule}
5843 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5844 &highest&&&&&\cr
5845 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5846 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5847 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5848 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5849 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5850 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5851 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5852 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5853 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5854 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5855 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5856 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5857 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5858 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5859 \hrule}
5860 @end tex
5861 @iftex
5862 {
5863 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5864 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5865 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5866 }
5867 @end iftex
5868 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5869
5870 @node Evaluation
5871 @subsection Evaluation
5872 @cindex lazy evaluation
5873 @cindex expression evaluation order
5874 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5875 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5876
5877 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5878 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5879 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5880 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5881
5882 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5883 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5884 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5885 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5886
5887 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5888 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5889 allocation.
5890
5891 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5892 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5893
5894 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5895 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5896 following
5897 @smallexample
5898 @group
5899 SECTIONS
5900 @{
5901 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5902 @{ *(.text) @}
5903 @}
5904 @end group
5905 @end smallexample
5906 @noindent
5907 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5908 address}.
5909
5910 @node Expression Section
5911 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5912 @cindex expression sections
5913 @cindex absolute expressions
5914 @cindex relative expressions
5915 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5916 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5917 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5918 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5919 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5920 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5921 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5922 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5923 operations.
5924
5925 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5926 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5927 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5928 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5929 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5930 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5931 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5932 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5933 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5934 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5935 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5936 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5937 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5938 everywhere.
5939
5940 In the following simple example,
5941
5942 @smallexample
5943 @group
5944 SECTIONS
5945 @{
5946 . = 0x100;
5947 __executable_start = 0x100;
5948 .data :
5949 @{
5950 . = 0x10;
5951 __data_start = 0x10;
5952 *(.data)
5953 @}
5954 @dots{}
5955 @}
5956 @end group
5957 @end smallexample
5958
5959 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5960 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5961 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5962 section in the second two assignments.
5963
5964 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5965 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5966
5967 @itemize @bullet
5968 @item
5969 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5970 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5971 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5972 @item
5973 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5974 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5975 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5976 @item
5977 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5978 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5979 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5980 before applying the operator.
5981 @end itemize
5982
5983 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5984
5985 @itemize @bullet
5986 @item
5987 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5988 @item
5989 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5990 @item
5991 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5992 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5993 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5994 @item
5995 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5996 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5997 section as the relative operand(s).
5998 @item
5999 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6000 conversions) is an absolute address.
6001 @end itemize
6002
6003 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6004 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6005 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6006 section @samp{.data}:
6007 @smallexample
6008 SECTIONS
6009 @{
6010 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6011 @}
6012 @end smallexample
6013 @noindent
6014 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6015 @samp{.data} section.
6016
6017 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6018 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6019
6020 @node Builtin Functions
6021 @subsection Builtin Functions
6022 @cindex functions in expressions
6023 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6024 use in linker script expressions.
6025
6026 @table @code
6027 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6028 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6029 @cindex expression, absolute
6030 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6031 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6032 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6033 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6034
6035 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6036 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6037 @cindex section address in expression
6038 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6039 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6040 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6041 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6042 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6043 the other two will be absolute:
6044 @smallexample
6045 @group
6046 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6047 .output1 :
6048 @{
6049 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6050 @dots{}
6051 @}
6052 .output :
6053 @{
6054 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6055 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6056 @}
6057 @dots{} @}
6058 @end group
6059 @end smallexample
6060
6061 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6062 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6063 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6064 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6065 @cindex round up location counter
6066 @cindex align location counter
6067 @cindex round up expression
6068 @cindex align expression
6069 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6070 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6071 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6072 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6073 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6074 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6075
6076 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6077 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6078 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6079 input sections:
6080 @smallexample
6081 @group
6082 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6083 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6084 *(.data)
6085 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6086 @}
6087 @dots{} @}
6088 @end group
6089 @end smallexample
6090 @noindent
6091 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6092 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6093 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6094 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6095
6096 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6097
6098 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6099 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6100 @cindex section alignment
6101 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6102 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6103 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6104 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6105 value in that section.
6106 @smallexample
6107 @group
6108 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6109 .output @{
6110 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6111 @dots{}
6112 @}
6113 @dots{} @}
6114 @end group
6115 @end smallexample
6116
6117 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6118 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6119 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6120 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6121 section.
6122
6123 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6124 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6125 This is equivalent to either
6126 @smallexample
6127 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6128 @end smallexample
6129 or
6130 @smallexample
6131 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6132 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6133 @end smallexample
6134 @noindent
6135 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6136 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6137 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6138 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6139 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6140 bytes in the on-disk file.
6141
6142 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6143 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6144 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6145 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6146 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6147
6148 @noindent
6149 Example:
6150 @smallexample
6151 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6152 @end smallexample
6153
6154 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6155 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6156 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6157 evaluation purposes.
6158
6159 @smallexample
6160 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6161 @end smallexample
6162
6163 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6164 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6165 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6166 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6167 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6168 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6169 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6170 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6171 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6172 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6173 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6174 section alignment.
6175
6176 @smallexample
6177 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6178 @end smallexample
6179
6180 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6181 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6182 @cindex symbol defaults
6183 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6184 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6185 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6186 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6187 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6188 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6189 existed, its value is preserved:
6190
6191 @smallexample
6192 @group
6193 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6194 .text : @{
6195 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6196 @dots{}
6197 @}
6198 @dots{}
6199 @}
6200 @end group
6201 @end smallexample
6202
6203 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6204 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6205 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6206
6207 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6208 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6209 @cindex section load address in expression
6210 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6211 Section LMA}).
6212
6213 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6214 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6215 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6216 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6217
6218 @kindex MAX
6219 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6220 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6221
6222 @kindex MIN
6223 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6224 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6225
6226 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6227 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6228 @cindex unallocated address, next
6229 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6230 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6231 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6232 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6233
6234 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6235 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6236 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6237
6238 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6239 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6240 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6241 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6242 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6243 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6244 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6245 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6246 name.
6247
6248 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6249 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6250 @cindex section size
6251 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6252 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6253 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6254 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6255 @smallexample
6256 @group
6257 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6258 .output @{
6259 .start = . ;
6260 @dots{}
6261 .end = . ;
6262 @}
6263 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6264 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6265 @dots{} @}
6266 @end group
6267 @end smallexample
6268
6269 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6270 @itemx sizeof_headers
6271 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6272 @cindex header size
6273 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6274 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6275 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6276 choose, to facilitate paging.
6277
6278 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6279 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6280 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6281 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6282 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6283 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6284 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6285 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6286 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6287 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6288 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6289 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6290 @end table
6291
6292 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6293 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6294 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6295 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6296 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6297 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6298 linker will report an error.
6299
6300 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6301
6302 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6303 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6304 commands.
6305
6306 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6307 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6308 read. This can affect archive searching.
6309
6310 @ifset GENERIC
6311 @node Machine Dependent
6312 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6313
6314 @cindex machine dependencies
6315 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6316 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6317 functionality are not listed.
6318
6319 @menu
6320 @ifset H8300
6321 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6322 @end ifset
6323 @ifset I960
6324 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6325 @end ifset
6326 @ifset M68HC11
6327 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6328 @end ifset
6329 @ifset ARM
6330 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6331 @end ifset
6332 @ifset HPPA
6333 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6334 @end ifset
6335 @ifset M68K
6336 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6337 @end ifset
6338 @ifset MIPS
6339 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6340 @end ifset
6341 @ifset MMIX
6342 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6343 @end ifset
6344 @ifset MSP430
6345 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6346 @end ifset
6347 @ifset NDS32
6348 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6349 @end ifset
6350 @ifset NIOSII
6351 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6352 @end ifset
6353 @ifset POWERPC
6354 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6355 @end ifset
6356 @ifset POWERPC64
6357 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6358 @end ifset
6359 @ifset SPU
6360 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6361 @end ifset
6362 @ifset TICOFF
6363 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6364 @end ifset
6365 @ifset WIN32
6366 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6367 @end ifset
6368 @ifset XTENSA
6369 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6370 @end ifset
6371 @end menu
6372 @end ifset
6373
6374 @ifset H8300
6375 @ifclear GENERIC
6376 @raisesections
6377 @end ifclear
6378
6379 @node H8/300
6380 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6381
6382 @cindex H8/300 support
6383 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6384 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6385
6386 @table @emph
6387 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6388 @item relaxing address modes
6389 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6390 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6391 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6392 respectively.
6393
6394 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6395 @item synthesizing instructions
6396 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6397 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6398 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6399 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6400 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6401 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6402 top page of memory).
6403
6404 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6405 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6406 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6407 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6408 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6409 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6410 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6411
6412 @item bit manipulation instructions
6413 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6414 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6415 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6416 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6417 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6418 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6419 the top page of memory).
6420
6421 @item system control instructions
6422 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6423 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6424 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6425 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6426 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6427 the top page of memory).
6428 @end table
6429
6430 @ifclear GENERIC
6431 @lowersections
6432 @end ifclear
6433 @end ifset
6434
6435 @ifclear GENERIC
6436 @ifset Renesas
6437 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6438 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6439 @node Renesas
6440 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6441
6442 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6443 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6444 options are required for these chips.
6445 @end ifset
6446 @end ifclear
6447
6448 @ifset I960
6449 @ifclear GENERIC
6450 @raisesections
6451 @end ifclear
6452
6453 @node i960
6454 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6455
6456 @cindex i960 support
6457
6458 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6459 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6460 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6461 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6462 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6463 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6464 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6465
6466 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6467 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6468 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6469 the names
6470
6471 @smallexample
6472 @group
6473 try
6474 libtry.a
6475 tryca
6476 libtryca.a
6477 @end group
6478 @end smallexample
6479
6480 @noindent
6481 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6482 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6483
6484 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6485 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6486 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6487 specifies a library.
6488
6489 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6490 @cindex relaxing on i960
6491 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6492 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6493 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6494 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6495 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6496 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6497 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6498 not itself call any subroutines).
6499
6500 @ifclear GENERIC
6501 @lowersections
6502 @end ifclear
6503 @end ifset
6504
6505 @ifset ARM
6506 @ifclear GENERIC
6507 @raisesections
6508 @end ifclear
6509
6510 @ifset M68HC11
6511 @ifclear GENERIC
6512 @raisesections
6513 @end ifclear
6514
6515 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6516 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6517
6518 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6519
6520 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6521
6522 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6523 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6524
6525 @table @emph
6526 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6527 @item relaxing address modes
6528 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6529 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6530 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6531 respectively.
6532
6533 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6534 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6535 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6536
6537 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6538 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6539 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6540 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6541 @code{bset} instructions.
6542
6543 @end table
6544
6545 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6546
6547 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6548 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6549 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6550 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6551 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6552 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6553 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6554 point to the function trampoline.
6555
6556 @ifclear GENERIC
6557 @lowersections
6558 @end ifclear
6559 @end ifset
6560
6561 @node ARM
6562 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6563
6564 @cindex ARM interworking support
6565 @kindex --support-old-code
6566 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6567 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6568 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6569 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6570 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6571 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6572 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6573 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6574 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6575 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6576
6577 @cindex thumb entry point
6578 @cindex entry point, thumb
6579 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6580 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6581 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6582 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6583 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6584 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6585
6586 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6587 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6588 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6589 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6590 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6591 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6592
6593 @cindex BE8
6594 @kindex --be8
6595 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6596 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6597 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6598 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6599 little-endian code.
6600
6601 @cindex TARGET1
6602 @kindex --target1-rel
6603 @kindex --target1-abs
6604 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6605 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6606 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6607 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6608
6609 @cindex TARGET2
6610 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6611 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6612 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6613 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6614 @table @samp
6615 @item rel
6616 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6617 @item abs
6618 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6619 @item got-rel
6620 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6621 @end table
6622
6623 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6624 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6625 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6626 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6627 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6628 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6629
6630 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6631 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6632 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6633
6634 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6635 relocations are ignored.
6636
6637 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6638 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6639 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6640 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6641
6642 @smallexample
6643 TST rM, #1
6644 MOVEQ PC, rM
6645 BX Rn
6646 @end smallexample
6647
6648 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6649 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6650 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6651
6652 @cindex USE_BLX
6653 @kindex --use-blx
6654 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6655 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6656 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6657 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6658 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6659
6660 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6661 specify it if you are using that target.
6662
6663 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6664 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6665 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6666 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6667 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6668 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6669 the support code can read the intended values.
6670
6671 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6672 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6673 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6674 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6675 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6676 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6677
6678 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6679 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6680 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6681 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6682 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6683 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6684
6685 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6686 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6687 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6688 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6689 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6690 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6691 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6692
6693 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6694 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6695 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6696 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6697 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6698 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6699 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6700
6701 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6702 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6703 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6704
6705 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6706 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6707
6708 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6709 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6710 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6711 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6712 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6713 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6714 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6715 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6716
6717 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6718 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6719
6720 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6721 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6722 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6723 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6724 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6725
6726 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6727 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6728 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6729 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6730 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6731 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6732
6733 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6734 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6735
6736 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6737 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6738 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6739 occurs.
6740
6741 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6742 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6743 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6744 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6745 occurs.
6746
6747 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6748 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6749 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6750 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6751 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6752 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6753 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6754 not be diagnosed.
6755
6756 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6757 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6758 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6759 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6760 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6761 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6762 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6763
6764 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6765 @kindex --pic-veneer
6766 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6767 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6768 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6769 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6770
6771 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6772 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6773 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6774 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6775 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6776 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6777 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6778 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6779 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6780 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6781 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6782 where they should be placed.
6783
6784 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6785 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6786 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6787 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6788 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6789 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6790 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6791 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6792 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6793 from the input sections.
6794
6795 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6796 @samp{N = +1}.
6797
6798 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6799 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6800 otherwise.
6801
6802 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6803 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6804 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6805 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6806
6807 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6808
6809 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6810 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6811 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6812 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6813
6814 Please contact ARM for further details.
6815
6816 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6817 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6818 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6819 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6820
6821 @kindex --long-plt
6822 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6823 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6824 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6825 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6826
6827 @ifclear GENERIC
6828 @lowersections
6829 @end ifclear
6830 @end ifset
6831
6832 @ifset HPPA
6833 @ifclear GENERIC
6834 @raisesections
6835 @end ifclear
6836
6837 @node HPPA ELF32
6838 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6839 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6840 @kindex --multi-subspace
6841 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6842 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6843 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6844 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6845 multiple sub-spaces.
6846
6847 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6848 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6849 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6850 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6851 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6852 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6853 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6854 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6855 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6856 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6857 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6858 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6859 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6860 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6861 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6862 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6863
6864 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6865 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6866 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6867 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6868
6869 @ifclear GENERIC
6870 @lowersections
6871 @end ifclear
6872 @end ifset
6873
6874 @ifset M68K
6875 @ifclear GENERIC
6876 @raisesections
6877 @end ifclear
6878
6879 @node M68K
6880 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6881
6882 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6883 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6884 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6885 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6886 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6887 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6888 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6889 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6890 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6891 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6892 support such GOTs.
6893 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6894 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6895 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6896 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6897
6898 @ifclear GENERIC
6899 @lowersections
6900 @end ifclear
6901 @end ifset
6902
6903 @ifset MIPS
6904 @ifclear GENERIC
6905 @raisesections
6906 @end ifclear
6907
6908 @node MIPS
6909 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6910
6911 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6912 @kindex --insn32
6913 @kindex --no-insn32
6914 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6915 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6916 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6917 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6918 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6919 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6920
6921 @ifclear GENERIC
6922 @lowersections
6923 @end ifclear
6924 @end ifset
6925
6926 @ifset MMIX
6927 @ifclear GENERIC
6928 @raisesections
6929 @end ifclear
6930
6931 @node MMIX
6932 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6933 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6934 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6935 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6936 can translate between the two formats.
6937
6938 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6939 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6940 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6941 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6942 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6943 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6944 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6945 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6946
6947 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6948 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6949 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6950 of a section.
6951
6952 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6953 are left out from an mmo file.
6954
6955 @ifclear GENERIC
6956 @lowersections
6957 @end ifclear
6958 @end ifset
6959
6960 @ifset MSP430
6961 @ifclear GENERIC
6962 @raisesections
6963 @end ifclear
6964
6965 @node MSP430
6966 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6967 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6968 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6969 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6970
6971 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6972 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6973
6974 @table @code
6975 @item @samp{.vectors}
6976 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6977
6978 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6979 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6980 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6981
6982 @item @samp{.infomem}
6983 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6984 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6985
6986 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6987 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6988 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6989
6990 @item @samp{.noinit}
6991 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6992
6993 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6994 @end table
6995
6996 @ifclear GENERIC
6997 @lowersections
6998 @end ifclear
6999 @end ifset
7000
7001 @ifset NDS32
7002 @ifclear GENERIC
7003 @raisesections
7004 @end ifclear
7005
7006 @node NDS32
7007 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7008 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7009 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7010 relaxes objects according to these options.
7011
7012 @table @code
7013 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7014 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7015
7016 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7017 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7018
7019 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7020 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7021
7022 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7023 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7024
7025 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7026 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7027
7028 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7029 Update the existing EX9 table.
7030
7031 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7032 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7033
7034 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7035 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7036
7037 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7038 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7039
7040 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7041 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7042 @end table
7043
7044 @ifclear GENERIC
7045 @lowersections
7046 @end ifclear
7047 @end ifset
7048
7049 @ifset NIOSII
7050 @ifclear GENERIC
7051 @raisesections
7052 @end ifclear
7053
7054 @node Nios II
7055 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7056 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7057 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7058
7059 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7060 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7061 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7062 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7063 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7064 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7065 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7066 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7067 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7068 larger than 256MB.
7069
7070 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7071 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7072 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7073 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7074 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7075 register as a temporary.
7076
7077 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7078 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7079 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7080
7081 @ifclear GENERIC
7082 @lowersections
7083 @end ifclear
7084 @end ifset
7085
7086 @ifset POWERPC
7087 @ifclear GENERIC
7088 @raisesections
7089 @end ifclear
7090
7091 @node PowerPC ELF32
7092 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7093 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7094 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7095 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7096 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7097 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7098 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7099 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7100 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7101 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7102 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7103 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7104 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7105
7106 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7107 @table @option
7108 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7109 @kindex --bss-plt
7110 @item --bss-plt
7111 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7112 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7113 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7114 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7115 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7116 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7117 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7118 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7119
7120 @kindex --secure-plt
7121 @item --secure-plt
7122 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7123 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7124 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7125 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7126 style BSS PLT.
7127
7128 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7129 @kindex --sdata-got
7130 @item --sdata-got
7131 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7132 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7133 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7134 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7135 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7136 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7137 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7138 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7139 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7140 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7141 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7142 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7143
7144 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7145 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7146 @item --emit-stub-syms
7147 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7148 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7149
7150 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7151 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7152 @item --no-tls-optimize
7153 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7154 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7155 disable the optimization.
7156 @end table
7157
7158 @ifclear GENERIC
7159 @lowersections
7160 @end ifclear
7161 @end ifset
7162
7163 @ifset POWERPC64
7164 @ifclear GENERIC
7165 @raisesections
7166 @end ifclear
7167
7168 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7169 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7170
7171 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7172 @table @option
7173 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7174 @kindex --stub-group-size
7175 @item --stub-group-size
7176 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7177 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7178 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7179 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7180 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7181 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7182 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7183 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7184 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7185 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7186 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7187 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7188 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7189 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7190
7191 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7192 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7193 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7194 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7195
7196 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7197 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7198 @item --emit-stub-syms
7199 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7200 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7201
7202 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7203 @kindex --dotsyms
7204 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7205 @item --dotsyms
7206 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7207 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7208 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7209 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7210 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7211 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7212 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7213 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7214 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7215 feature.
7216
7217 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7218 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7219 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7220 @item --save-restore-funcs
7221 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7222 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7223 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7224 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7225 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7226 link.
7227
7228 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7229 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7230 @item --no-tls-optimize
7231 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7232 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7233 disable the optimization.
7234
7235 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7236 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7237 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7238 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7239 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7240 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7241 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7242 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7243 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7244 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7245 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7246 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7247 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7248 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7249 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7250
7251 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7252 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7253 @item --no-opd-optimize
7254 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7255 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7256 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7257 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7258
7259 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7260 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7261 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7262 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7263 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7264 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7265 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7266
7267 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7268 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7269 @item --no-toc-optimize
7270 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7271 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7272 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7273 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7274 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7275 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7276 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7277 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7278 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7279 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7280 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7281 optimization.
7282
7283 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7284 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7285 @item --no-multi-toc
7286 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7287 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7288 where TOC
7289 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7290 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7291 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7292 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7293 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7294 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7295 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7296 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7297
7298 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7299 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7300 @item --no-toc-sort
7301 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7302 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7303 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7304 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7305 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7306 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7307 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7308 off this feature.
7309
7310 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7311 @kindex --plt-align
7312 @kindex --no-plt-align
7313 @item --plt-align
7314 @itemx --no-plt-align
7315 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7316 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7317 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7318 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7319 stubs are packed tightly.
7320
7321 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7322 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7323 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7324 @item --plt-static-chain
7325 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7326 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7327 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7328 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7329
7330 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7331 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7332 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7333 @item --plt-thread-safe
7334 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7335 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7336 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7337 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7338 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7339 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7340 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7341 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7342 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7343 default behaviour.
7344 @end table
7345
7346 @ifclear GENERIC
7347 @lowersections
7348 @end ifclear
7349 @end ifset
7350
7351 @ifset SPU
7352 @ifclear GENERIC
7353 @raisesections
7354 @end ifclear
7355
7356 @node SPU ELF
7357 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7358
7359 @cindex SPU ELF options
7360 @table @option
7361
7362 @cindex SPU plugins
7363 @kindex --plugin
7364 @item --plugin
7365 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7366
7367 @cindex SPU overlays
7368 @kindex --no-overlays
7369 @item --no-overlays
7370 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7371 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7372 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7373 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7374
7375 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7376 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7377 @item --emit-stub-syms
7378 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7379 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7380
7381 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7382 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7383 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7384 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7385 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7386 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7387
7388 @cindex SPU local store size
7389 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7390 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7391 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7392 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7393 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7394
7395 @cindex SPU
7396 @kindex --stack-analysis
7397 @item --stack-analysis
7398 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7399 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7400 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7401 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7402 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7403 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7404 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7405 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7406 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7407 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7408 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7409 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7410 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7411 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7412 and calls will be given.
7413
7414 @cindex SPU
7415 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7416 @item --emit-stack-syms
7417 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7418 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7419 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7420 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7421 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7422 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7423 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7424 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7425 @end table
7426
7427 @ifclear GENERIC
7428 @lowersections
7429 @end ifclear
7430 @end ifset
7431
7432 @ifset TICOFF
7433 @ifclear GENERIC
7434 @raisesections
7435 @end ifclear
7436
7437 @node TI COFF
7438 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7439 @cindex TI COFF versions
7440 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7441 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7442 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7443 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7444 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7445 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7446
7447 @ifclear GENERIC
7448 @lowersections
7449 @end ifclear
7450 @end ifset
7451
7452 @ifset WIN32
7453 @ifclear GENERIC
7454 @raisesections
7455 @end ifclear
7456
7457 @node WIN32
7458 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7459
7460 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7461 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7462 command line options mentioned here.
7463
7464 @table @emph
7465 @cindex import libraries
7466 @item import libraries
7467 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7468 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7469 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7470 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7471 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7472 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7473
7474 @item exporting DLL symbols
7475 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7476 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7477
7478 @table @emph
7479 @item using auto-export functionality
7480 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7481 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7482 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7483
7484 @itemize
7485 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7486 @item --exclude-symbols
7487 @item --exclude-libs
7488 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7489 @item --version-script
7490 @end itemize
7491
7492 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7493 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7494 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7495 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7496 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7497 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7498 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7499 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7500
7501 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7502 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7503 if either of the following are true:
7504
7505 @itemize
7506 @item A DEF file is used.
7507 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7508 @end itemize
7509
7510 @item using a DEF file
7511 @cindex using a DEF file
7512 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7513 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7514 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7515 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7516 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7517
7518 @example
7519 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7520 @end example
7521
7522 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7523 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7524
7525 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7526
7527 @example
7528 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7529
7530 EXPORTS
7531 foo
7532 bar
7533 _bar = bar
7534 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7535 var1 DATA
7536 doo = foo == foo2
7537 eoo DATA == var1
7538 @end example
7539
7540 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7541 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7542 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7543 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7544 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7545 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7546 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7547 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7548 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7549
7550 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7551 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7552 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7553
7554 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7555 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7556 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7557 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7558
7559 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7560 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7561 non-default base address for the image.
7562
7563 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7564 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7565 filename specified on the command line.
7566
7567 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7568
7569 @example
7570 EXPORTS
7571 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7572 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7573 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7574 @end example
7575
7576 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7577 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7578 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7579 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7580 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7581 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7582 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7583
7584 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7585
7586 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7587 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7588 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7589 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7590 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7591
7592 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7593 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7594 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7595 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7596
7597 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7598 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7599 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7600 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7601 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7602 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7603 application will behave unexpectedly.
7604
7605 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7606 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7607 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7608 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7609 the DLL without an import library.
7610
7611 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7612 other DEF file statements
7613
7614 @cindex creating a DEF file
7615 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7616 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7617
7618 @item Using decorations
7619 @cindex Using decorations
7620 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7621 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7622 declared as:
7623
7624 @example
7625 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7626 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7627 @end example
7628
7629 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7630 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7631 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7632 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7633
7634 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7635 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7636 instead:
7637
7638 @example
7639 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7640 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7641 @end example
7642
7643 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7644 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7645 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7646 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7647 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7648 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7649 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7650 information.
7651 @end table
7652
7653 @cindex automatic data imports
7654 @item automatic data imports
7655 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7656 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7657 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7658 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7659 code to these platforms, especially for large
7660 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7661 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7662 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7663 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7664 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7665 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7666 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7667 trigger the feature's use.
7668
7669 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7670 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7671
7672 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7673 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7674
7675 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7676 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7677 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7678 below.
7679
7680 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7681 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7682 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7683 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7684 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7685 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7686 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7687 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7688 references.
7689
7690 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7691 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7692 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7693 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7694 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7695 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7696 run without error on an older system.
7697
7698 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7699 enabled as needed.
7700
7701 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7702 @item direct linking to a dll
7703 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7704 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7705 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7706 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7707 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7708 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7709 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7710 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7711 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7712 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7713
7714 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7715 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7716 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7717 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7718 select the dll instead of an import library.
7719
7720
7721 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7722 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7723
7724 @example
7725 libxxx.dll.a
7726 xxx.dll.a
7727 libxxx.a
7728 xxx.lib
7729 cygxxx.dll (*)
7730 libxxx.dll
7731 xxx.dll
7732 @end example
7733
7734 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7735
7736 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7737 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7738 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7739 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7740 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7741
7742 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7743 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7744 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7745 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7746 could coexist on the same machine.
7747
7748 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7749 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7750 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7751
7752 @example
7753 bin/
7754 cygxxx.dll
7755 lib/
7756 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7757 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7758 @end example
7759
7760 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7761 done two ways:
7762
7763 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7764 @example
7765 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7766 @end example
7767
7768 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7769 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7770 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7771 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7772
7773 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7774 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7775 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7776 making the app/dll.
7777
7778 @example
7779 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7780 @end example
7781
7782 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7783
7784 @example
7785 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7786 @end example
7787
7788 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7789 perfectly legal
7790
7791 @example
7792 bin/
7793 cygxxx-5.dll
7794 lib/
7795 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7796 @end example
7797
7798 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7799 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7800 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7801
7802 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7803 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7804
7805 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7806 work with auto-imported data.
7807
7808 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7809 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7810 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7811 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7812 possible to do this without an import lib.
7813
7814 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7815 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7816 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7817 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7818
7819 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7820 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7821 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7822 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7823 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7824 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7825 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7826
7827 @item symbol aliasing
7828 @table @emph
7829 @item adding additional names
7830 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7831 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7832 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7833 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7834 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7835
7836 @example
7837 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7838
7839 EXPORTS
7840 foo
7841 _foo = foo
7842 @end example
7843
7844 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7845
7846 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7847 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7848
7849 @example
7850 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7851 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7852 @end example
7853
7854 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7855 symbols.
7856
7857 @item renaming symbols
7858 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7859 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7860 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7861 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7862 created). In the following example:
7863
7864 @example
7865 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7866
7867 EXPORTS
7868 _foo = foo
7869 @end example
7870
7871 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7872 @samp{_foo}.
7873 @end table
7874
7875 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7876 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7877 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7878 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7879 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7880 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7881 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7882 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7883 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7884 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7885 which is probably not what you wanted.
7886
7887 @cindex weak externals
7888 @item weak externals
7889 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7890 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7891 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7892 are three variants of weak externals:
7893 @itemize
7894 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7895 called lazy externals.
7896 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7897 This form is not presently implemented.
7898 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7899 implemented.
7900 @end itemize
7901 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7902 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7903 uses a default value.
7904
7905 @cindex aligned common symbols
7906 @item aligned common symbols
7907 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7908 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7909 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7910 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7911 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7912 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7913 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7914 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7915
7916 @end table
7917
7918 @ifclear GENERIC
7919 @lowersections
7920 @end ifclear
7921 @end ifset
7922
7923 @ifset XTENSA
7924 @ifclear GENERIC
7925 @raisesections
7926 @end ifclear
7927
7928 @node Xtensa
7929 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7930
7931 @cindex Xtensa processors
7932 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7933 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7934 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7935 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7936 example, with the command:
7937
7938 @smallexample
7939 SECTIONS
7940 @{
7941 .text : @{
7942 *(.literal .text)
7943 @}
7944 @}
7945 @end smallexample
7946
7947 @noindent
7948 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7949 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7950 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7951 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7952 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7953 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7954 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7955
7956 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7957 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7958 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7959 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7960 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7961 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7962 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7963 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7964 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7965 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7966 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7967 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7968
7969 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7970 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7971 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7972 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7973 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7974 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7975 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7976 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7977 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7978 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7979 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7980 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7981 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7982 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7983
7984 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7985 control the linker:
7986
7987 @cindex Xtensa options
7988 @table @option
7989 @item --size-opt
7990 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7991 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7992 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7993 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7994 preserve the correctness of the code.
7995 @end table
7996
7997 @ifclear GENERIC
7998 @lowersections
7999 @end ifclear
8000 @end ifset
8001
8002 @ifclear SingleFormat
8003 @node BFD
8004 @chapter BFD
8005
8006 @cindex back end
8007 @cindex object file management
8008 @cindex object formats available
8009 @kindex objdump -i
8010 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8011 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8012 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8013 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8014 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8015 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8016 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8017 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8018 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8019
8020 @cindex BFD requirements
8021 @cindex requirements for BFD
8022 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8023 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8024 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8025 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8026 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8027 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8028 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8029
8030 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8031 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8032 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8033 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8034
8035 @menu
8036 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8037 @end menu
8038
8039 @node BFD outline
8040 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8041 @cindex opening object files
8042 @include bfdsumm.texi
8043 @end ifclear
8044
8045 @node Reporting Bugs
8046 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8047 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8048 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8049
8050 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8051
8052 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8053 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8054 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8055 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8056 @command{ld}.
8057
8058 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8059 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8060
8061 @menu
8062 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8063 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8064 @end menu
8065
8066 @node Bug Criteria
8067 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8068 @cindex bug criteria
8069
8070 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8071
8072 @itemize @bullet
8073 @cindex fatal signal
8074 @cindex linker crash
8075 @cindex crash of linker
8076 @item
8077 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8078 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8079
8080 @cindex error on valid input
8081 @item
8082 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8083
8084 @cindex invalid input
8085 @item
8086 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8087 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8088 object files are correct.
8089
8090 @item
8091 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8092 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8093 @end itemize
8094
8095 @node Bug Reporting
8096 @section How to Report Bugs
8097 @cindex bug reports
8098 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8099
8100 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8101 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8102 recommend you contact that organization first.
8103
8104 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8105 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8106 distribution.
8107
8108 @ifset BUGURL
8109 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8110 @value{BUGURL}.
8111 @end ifset
8112
8113 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8114 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8115 fact or leave it out, state it!
8116
8117 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8118 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8119 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8120 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8121 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8122 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8123 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8124 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8125 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8126 and the most helpful.
8127
8128 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8129 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8130 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8131
8132 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8133 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8134 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8135 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8136
8137 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8138
8139 @itemize @bullet
8140 @item
8141 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8142 the @samp{--version} argument.
8143
8144 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8145 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8146
8147 @item
8148 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8149 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8150
8151 @item
8152 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8153 version number.
8154
8155 @item
8156 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8157 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8158
8159 @item
8160 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8161 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8162 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8163 sufficient.
8164
8165 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8166 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8167
8168 @item
8169 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8170 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8171 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8172 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8173 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8174 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8175 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8176 attachments are best.
8177
8178 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8179 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8180 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8181 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8182 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8183
8184 @item
8185 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8186 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8187
8188 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8189 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8190 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8191 a chance to make a mistake.
8192
8193 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8194 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8195 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8196 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8197 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8198 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8199 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8200 any conclusion from our observations.
8201
8202 @item
8203 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8204 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8205 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8206 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8207 context, not by line number.
8208
8209 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8210 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8211 @end itemize
8212
8213 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8214
8215 @itemize @bullet
8216 @item
8217 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8218
8219 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8220 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8221 changes will not affect it.
8222
8223 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8224 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8225 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8226 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8227
8228 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8229 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8230 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8231 less time, and so on.
8232
8233 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8234 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8235
8236 @item
8237 A patch for the bug.
8238
8239 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8240 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8241 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8242 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8243
8244 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8245 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8246 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8247 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8248 fixed.
8249
8250 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8251 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8252 help us to understand.
8253
8254 @item
8255 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8256
8257 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8258 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8259 @end itemize
8260
8261 @node MRI
8262 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8263 @cindex MRI compatibility
8264 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8265 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8266 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8267 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8268 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8269 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8270 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8271
8272 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8273 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8274 features to make use of them.
8275
8276 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8277 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8278
8279 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8280 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8281 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8282 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8283 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8284
8285 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8286
8287 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8288 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8289 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8290
8291 @table @code
8292 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8293 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8294 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8295 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8296 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8297 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8298 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8299 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8300 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8301 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8302 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8303
8304 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8305 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8306 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8307 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8308
8309 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8310
8311 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8312 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8313 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8314 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8315
8316 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8317 @item BASE @var{expression}
8318 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8319 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8320
8321 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8322 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8323 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8324 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8325
8326 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8327 @item END
8328 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8329
8330 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8331 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8332 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8333 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8334
8335 @enumerate
8336 @item
8337 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8338
8339 @item
8340 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8341
8342 @item
8343 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8344 @samp{COFF}
8345 @end enumerate
8346
8347 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8348 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8349 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8350 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8351
8352 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8353 same line, with no change in its effect.
8354
8355 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8356 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8357 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8358 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8359 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8360 command line.
8361
8362 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8363 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8364 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8365 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8366 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8367
8368 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8369 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8370 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8371 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8372 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8373 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8374 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8375 file, in the order specified.
8376
8377 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8378 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8379 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8380 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8381 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8382 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8383
8384 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8385 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8386 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8387 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8388 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8389 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8390 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8391 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8392 @end table
8393
8394 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8395 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8396 @include fdl.texi
8397
8398 @node LD Index
8399 @unnumbered LD Index
8400
8401 @printindex cp
8402
8403 @tex
8404 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8405 % meantime:
8406 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8407 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8408 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8409 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8410 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8411 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8412 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8413 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8414 \page\colophon
8415 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8416 @end tex
8417
8418 @bye